PROJECT MANUAL UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM UVA UH HEP Office Suite
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP Office Suite Charlottesville, Virginia PROJECT MANUAL Construction Documents PIMS NUMBER: P02990 WORK ORDER NUMBER: 1496104 HKS, INC. 2100 E. Cary St, Suite 100 Richmond, VA 23223 (804) 644-8400 (804) 644-8469 FAX January 15, 2014 HKS 16567.004 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA TABLE OF CONTENTS LEGEND FIRST COLUMN: LATEST ISSUE DATE OF SECTION SECOND COLUMN: "X" IN BOX INDICATES SECTION IS INCLUDED IN CURRENT PRINTING THIRD COLUMN: REVISION NUMBER (“O” INDICATES ORIGINAL, REVISIONS ARE NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY) FOURTH COLUMN: SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER FIFTH COLUMN: SPECIFICATION SECTION TITLE NOTE FOR REVISED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS 1. DELETED INFORMATION IS INDICATED BY A STRIKE THROUGH (IE, THIS IS DELETED). 2. NEW INFORMATION IS INDICATED BY A DOUBLE UNDERLINE (IE, THIS IS ADDED). 3. ALL REVISED INFORMATION IS FURTHER IDENTIFIED BY A HEAVY VERTICAL LINE TO THE RIGHT OF ALL REVISIONS IN EACH INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATION SECTION (REFER TO HEAVY BOLD LINE TO THE RIGHT FOR AN EXAMPLE). ISSUES OF SPECIFICATIONS SECTIONS Date Description 2013-08-27 2013-10-04 2013-12-18 95% Construction Documents 95% Construction Documents Yellow-Out Resubmission 2014-01-15 Construction Documents HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 0 00200 00300 00350 2014-01-15 0 00700 2014-01-15 0 00850 Pre-Bid Question Form On-Demand Bid Form Information Available from University • ICRA Documents: • Policy • Guidelines • Authorization • Building Automation systems: • Proposal • Drawing General Conditions • HECO-7 General Conditions of the Construction Contract for Capital Outlay Projects (Dated 5/8/13) • CO-7 General Conditions of the Construction Contract (Dated April, 2013) Additional Documents • Instructions to Bidders (HECO-7a) [included by reference] • Contract between University and Contractor (HECO9) [included by reference] • Standard Performance Bond (HECO-10) [included by • 2014-01-15 0 00851 reference] Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (HECO10.1) [included by reference] • Contract Change Order (HECO-11) and Change Order Justification (HECO 11a) [included by reference] • General Contractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-GC-1) [included by reference] • Subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECOSC-1) [included by reference] • Sub-subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-SS-1) [included by reference] • Schedule of Values and Certificate of Payment (HECO-12) [included by reference] • Affidavit of Payment of Claims (CO-13) • Final Report of Structural and Special Inspections (HECO 13.1b) • Certificate of Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2) • Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2a) Drawing Index DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 01000 01010 01015 01027 01039 01200 General Provisions Summary of Work Miscellaneous Provisions and Conditions Additional Instructions to Applications for Payment Project Coordination and Meetings Alternates HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 01300 01312 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01320 01350 01400 01420 01500 01502 01600 01630 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 0 0 0 01640 01700 01710 01731 01770 Submittals Project Communications • Attachment - Request for Information (RFI) Form Construction Progress Documentation Alterations Project Procedures Quality Control and Quality Assurance References Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Dust Control Product Requirements Product Substitution Procedures • Attachment: Substitution Request Form University Furnished Products Execution Requirements Project Clarifications Cutting and Patching Closeout Procedures DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 2014-01-15 0 02 4119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NO SECTIONS DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NO SECTIONS DIVISION 05 - METALS NO SECTIONS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES NO SECTIONS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 0 07 8413 07 8446 07 9200 Penetration Firestopping Fire Resistive Joint Firestopping Joint Sealants 08 1114 08 1416 08 7100 08 8000 Interior Hollow Metal Frames Prefinished Flush Wood Doors Door Hardware Glazing DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 0 0 HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 2014-01-15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 09 2900 09 5113 09 6229 09 6500 09 6513 09 6800 09 9100 Gypsum Board Assemblies Acoustical Panel Ceilings Cork Flooring Resilient Flooring Resilient Base and Accessories Carpeting Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES NO SECTIONS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NO SECTIONS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NO SECTIONS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NO SECTIONS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NO SECTIONS DIVISIONS 15-20 - RESERVED NO SECTIONS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISION 24 - RESERVED NO SECTIONS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY NO SECTIONS - Refer to the drawings DIVISIONS 29-30 - RESERVED NO SECTIONS DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK NO SECTIONS DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NO SECTIONS DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NO SECTIONS DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION NO SECTIONS DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION NO SECTIONS DIVISIONS 36-39 - RESERVED NO SECTIONS DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION NO SECTIONS DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT NO SECTIONS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT NO SECTIONS DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT NO SECTIONS DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT NO SECTIONS DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT NO SECTIONS DIVISIONS 46-47 - RESERVED NO SECTIONS DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION NO SECTIONS DIVISION 49 - RESERVED NO SECTIONS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 TOC - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 00200 PRE-BID QUESTION FORM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PRE-BID QUESTION FORM A. Pre-Bid Question Form immediately follow this Section. PART 2 - (NOT USED) PART 3 - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00200 - 1 PRE-BID QUESTION FORM HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00200 - 2 PRE-BID QUESTION FORM Use separate form for each question submitted Date: __________________________ Project: UH HEP OFFICE SUITE PIMS # P02990 Project Code: NA WO # 1496104 Question concerning Drawing Sheet # ____________: ____________________________________________ _____________________ ____________________________________________ _________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Question concerning Specification Section # ____________, page _________, paragraph _________: _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ All responses to questions will be made by Amendment / Addendum Submitted by: (Print) ____________________________ ______ (Sign) ________________ Organization_ Email to: _______ [email protected] A/E (email) ______ Phone # and [email protected] UVA Project Manager (email) or Fax to: A/E Firm: ATTN: FAX: HKS, Inc. Catherine Porzio (804) 644-8469 UVA PM: FAX: Christian Pouncey (434) 924-7176 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 00300 BID FORM DATE: _______________ PROJECT: UVA HEP Office Suite Charlottesville, Virginia A/E Project Number: 16567.004 PIMS #: P02990 Work Order No.: 1496104 BID TO: Commonwealth of Virginia and The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia Facilities Planning and Construction - Office of Contract Administration c/o Tony DiTolve, Construction Contract Administrator 1000 Ednam Center Suite 100 (22903 for hand delivery) PO Box 400892 (U.S. Mail) Charlottesville, VA 22904-4892 In compliance with and subject to your Invitation for Bids and the documents therein specified, all of which are incorporated herein by reference, the undersigned bidder proposes to furnish all labor, equipment, and materials and perform all work necessary for construction of this project, in accordance with the Plans and Specifications dated January 15 2014, and the Addenda noted below, as prepared by HKS INC., 2100 EAST CARY STREET, SUITE 100, RICHMOND, VIRGINIA 23223 for the consideration of the following amounts: BASE BID Lump sum price for renovation for the Work, including staging, shipping and work areas, as well as administrative offices as indicated in the documents. Work includes necessary mechanical, electrical, and plumbing upgrades: BASE BID: _______________________________________________________________________ Dollars: $ . HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00300 - 1 BID FORM Contract Award will be based on the Base Bid amount shown on previous page (including any properly submitted bid modifications). BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS: The undersigned agrees that it will use as the subcontractor, for any and all Building Automation Systems Johnson Controls Inc., Controls Group, a subcontractor selected by the Owner, for a subcontractor price of twenty-eight thousand nine hundred and 00/100 Dollars ($28,900) and that this quote shall be included in BASE BID above. The undersigned agrees that it will be responsible for this subcontractor and its work as if it had been selected by the undersigned. NOTE: This price does not include bond. The undersigned understands that time is of the essence and agrees that the time for Substantial Completion of the entire project shall be 90 consecutive calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work as specified in the Notice to Proceed, and Final Completion shall be achieved within 30 consecutive calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion as determined by the A/E. Acknowledgment is made of receipt of the following Addenda: ______________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________. If notice of acceptance of this bid is given to the undersigned within 30 days after the date of opening of bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will execute and deliver a contract in the prescribed form (Commonwealth of Virginia Contract Between University and Contractor, Form HECO-9) within 10 days after the contract has been presented to him for signature. The required payment and performance bonds, on the forms prescribed, shall be delivered to the University along with the signed Contract. Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986: The undersigned certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of the Contract for this project violate the provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits employment of illegal aliens. DISQUALIFICATION OF CM/GCS: By signing this bid or proposal, the undersigned certifies that this Bidder or any officer, director, partner or University is not currently barred from bidding on contracts by any Agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or any public body or agency of another state, or any agency of the federal government, nor is this Bidder a subsidiary or affiliate of any firm/corporation that is currently barred from bidding on contracts by any of the same. We have attached an explanation of any previous disbarment(s) and copies of notice(s) of reinstatement(s). Either the undersigned or one of the following individuals, if any, is authorized to modify this bid prior to the deadline for receipt of bids by writing the modification and signing his name on the face of the bid, on the envelope in which it is enclosed, on a separate document, or on a document which is telefaxed to the University or by sending the University a telegraphic message: _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00300 - 2 BID FORM I certify that the firm name given below is the true and complete name of the bidder and that the bidder is legally qualified and licensed by the Commonwealth of Virginia, Department of Commerce, State Board for CM/GCs, to perform all Work included in the scope of the Contract. (The Bid Form must be signed by a Corporate Officer or a person who has written delegated authority to commit this firm for the purposes described herein by the University.) Virginia License No. ______________ Bidder ______________________________ (Name of Firm) CM/GC Class ________________ By___________________________________ (Signature) Specialty _______________________ Valid until ______________________ ____________________________________ (Typed Name) FEIN/SSN: ________________________ If Partnership (List Partners' Names) Title _______________________________ If Corporation, affix Corporate Seal & list State of Incorporation _________________________________ ____________________________________ State: _____________________________ (Affix Corporate Seal) Business Address: ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ Telephone # __________________________ FAX # ________________________________ E-mail address _________________________ HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00300 - 3 BID FORM HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00300 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 00350 INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM UNIVERSITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section references other information relevant to the construction of this Project that is available from the University. B. At the request of the University, the information identified below represents services that have been provided by others, not as an Architect’s Consultant, regarding conditions that affect this Project that are beyond the responsibilities of the Architect and Architect’s Consultants. Reference to such information herein is solely for the convenience of the University. Architect makes no representation, express or implied, as to the accuracy or validity of the information. C. Bidders are expected to examine the site and the information available from the University to determine for themselves the conditions to be encountered. D. If conditions other than those indicated in the information available from the University are encountered before or during construction, notify the University before work continues. 1.2 INFECTION CONTROL RISK ASSESSMENT REPORT A. The University will assess the environmental impact of the work on the existing, adjacent healthcare functions, and will prepare an Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) report that includes specific requirements of the CM/GC. B. An outline of the CM/GCs Required Procedures follows this section. Additional project specific information will be provided before the start of construction. C. The IRCA establishes strategic infection control provisions and requirements for the purpose of controlling the dissemination of airborne micro-organism contaminants encountered or generated during the construction process through the use of containment protocols and environmental monitoring. 1.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS A. Building Automation Systems: To be included in the Contractor's bid; refer to Division 00 Section "Bid Form". Information supporting said bid is contained in the proposal and drawing that follows this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00350 - 1 INFORMATION AVAILABLE FROM UNIVERSITY HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00350 - 2 Approved by Safety & Security Committee, 7/3/02 University of Virginia Health System Infection Control Risk Assessment for Construction Policy & Procedure June 19, 2002 POLICY An Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) must be performed for all construction, renovation, repair and demolition projects in any facility directly related to or vertically or horizontally adjacent to patient care activities. The person responsible for the specific project will initiate the ICRA and a copy will be filed with Health System Physical Plant. The types of projects that require an ICRA are as follows: 1. Any project managed or initiated by Facilities Planning & Construction 2. Any project managed or initiated by Health System Physical Plant Small Project Group or Zone Maintenance 3. Any project managed or initiated by contracted vendors or others such as ROLM, Health System Computing Services and Security 4. Any project managed or initiated by KCRC & Satellite Facilities Services 5. Any project managed or initiated by Health Services Foundation 6. Any other project for or affecting an affiliate of the Health System. PROCEDURE 1. All employees and workers performing work involving construction, renovation, repair, demolition and/or routine maintenance must complete ICRA training annually. 2. Review the Infection Control Risk Assessment Guideline a. Identify the type of construction activity (Types A – D). b. Identify the patient risk groups (Low, Medium or High Risk). c. Match the construction activity and patient risk group to determine the class of precautions that must be established (Class I – V). 3. Complete the Infection Control Risk Assessment Authorization for Construction a. Class I, Class II and Class III projects may proceed without prior approval from the UVA Infection Control group and do not require an ICRA Authorization form, provided that those responsible for the project have completed the mandatory training and are certified by UVA Infection Control within the previous year of the commencement of the project. b. Class IV and V projects require the completion of the Infection Control Risk Assessment Authorization. Completion of the Authorization includes all applicable reviews, approvals and signatures by the person responsible for the project. UVA Infection Control must review and approve the authorization form prior to the commencement of the project. c. Revisions to this policy and procedure will be the joint responsibility of Infection Control and the Life Safety Subcommittee. Infection Control Risk Assessment Guidelines Identify the Type of Construction Project Activity (Types A-D) Non-invasive activities, including, but not limited to: A a. b. B C D Removal of ceiling tiles where no dust is expected Painting, but not sanding c. Wall covering, electrical trim work, minor plumbing, and activities which do not generate dust or require cutting of walls or access to ceilings other than for visual inspection Small scale, short duration activities which create minimal dust, including but not limited to: a. Installation of telephone and computer cabling b. Access to chase spaces c. Cutting of walls or ceiling where dust migration can be controlled. Work that generates a moderate to high level of dust or requires demolition or removal of any fixed building components or assemblies, including but not limited to: a. Sanding of walls for painting or wall covering b. Removal of floor coverings, ceiling tiles, and casework c. New wall construction d. Minor duct work or electrical work above ceilings e. Major cabling activities f. Any type A, B or C activity that cannot be completed within a single work shift. Major demolition and construction projects, including but not limited to: a. Activities requiring heavy demolition or removal of a complete cabling system b. New construction Identify the Patient Risk Group that will be affected. If more than one risk group will be affected, select the higher group. For all construction classes, patients must be removed from the room while work is performed. Low Medium High All outpatient clinics and offices, except outpatient transplant clinics and outpatient cancer center clinics All inpatient areas, except inpatient oncology, bone marrow transplant, adult oncology, and pediatric oncology. Outpatient transplant clinics and outpatient cancer center clinics. Inpatient oncology, inpatient bone marrow transplant, inpatient adult oncology, inpatient pediatric oncology, any other areas caring for immunocompromised patients. Match the Patient Risk Group (L, M, H) with the Construction Project Type (A, B, C, D) to find the Class of Precautions (I – V) Construction Project Type Patient Risk Group Low Risk Medium Risk High Risk Type A I II (no cone, unless burn patient with uncovered wounds or transplant) II (cone; pts. Must be out of room; this includes lung transplant pts.) Type B II III (no cone, unless burn patient with uncovered wounds or transplant) IV Type C IV V Type D V V V V Description of Required Infection Control Precautions by Class Class Class I 1. Class II 2. 1. Class III 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Class IV 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Class V 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. During Construction Project Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Immediately replace ceiling tile if displaced. High Risk patients must remain out of room for one hour after completion of work. Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust. Immediately replace ceiling tile if displaced. Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust. Immediately replace ceiling tile if displaced Provide active means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. Water-mist work surfaces to control dust while cutting. Seal unused doors with duct tape. Block off and seal HVAC registers and grills. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area. Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers Install plastic dust barriers to seal area from non-work area or implement control cube method (cart with plastic covering and sealed connection to work site with HEPA vacuum for vacuuming prior to exit) before construction begins. Isolate HVAC system in areas where work is being performed to prevent contamination of duct system. Maintain negative pressure within work site utilizing HEPA equipped air filtration units. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area. Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers. All work associated with a major project that has an approved ICRA authorization form will be assessed on an individual basis. Construct gypsum board/metal stud dust partition, extend and seal to ceiling. Isolate HVAC system within work areas to prevent contamination of duct system. Seal doors opening to adjacent areas with duct tape. Block off and seal HVAC registers, grills and any openings in ductwork to remain. Maintain negative pressure within work site utilizing HEPA equipped air filtration units. Place dust mat at entrance and exit of work area. Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers. All work associated with a major project that has an approved ICRA authorization form will be assessed on an individual basis. Upon Completion of Project 1. 2. Remove all visible debris with a wet towel and/or mop. Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant. 1. 2. Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers. Wet mop and/or vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work area. Open previously sealed HVAC registers and grills. Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers. Do not remove barriers from work area until a Health System responsible person inspects completed project. Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread of dirt and debris associated with construction. Wet mop and vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work area. Remove isolation of HVAC system in areas where work was being performed. Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant. Cover construction waste before transport in covered containers. Do not remove barriers from work area until a Health System responsible person inspects completed project. Remove barrier materials carefully to minimize spread of dirt and debris associated with construction. Wet mop and vacuum with HEPA filtered vacuum before leaving work area. Remove isolation of HVAC system in areas where work was being performed. Housekeeping to wipe work surfaces with disinfectant. Infection Control Risk Assessment Authorization for Construction Project: WO# Location of Construction: Project Start Date: Project End Date: Contractor Performing Work: Responsible Person: Telephone: (Project Manager): Match the Patient Risk Group (L, M, H) with the Construction Project Type (A, B, C, D) to find the Class of Precautions (I – V). CIRCLE ONE Construction Project Type Patient Risk Type A Type B Type C Type D Group Low Risk I II IV V Medium Risk II III V V High Risk II IV V V Exceptions: Plenum Ceilings exist. Complete negative Pressure cannot be obtained Check if applicable Comments: Responsible Person: Project Manager Date Epidemiologist Dept Approval: (Revised 2/04) Date THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The General Conditions of this Contract immediately follow this Section and are listed as follows: 1. 2. B. Document HECO-7: General Conditions of the Construction Contract for Capital Outlay Projects, dated May 8, 2013. Document CO-7: General Conditions of the Construction Contract, dated April, 2013. The General Conditions shall apply to each and every Section of the Work as though written in full therein and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. PART 2 - (NOT USED) PART 3 - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00700 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00700 - 2 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 1 of 8 HECO-7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FOR CAPITAL OUTLAY PROJECTS 1. This addendum, HECO-7, modifies the Commonwealth of Virginia’s General Conditions of the Construction Contract DGS-30-054 Form CO-7 (04/13), (attached) for use on all Capital Outlay Projects. 2. For all forms referenced in the attachment by ‘‘CO-”, replace ‘‘CO-” with ‘‘HECO-,’’ except the CO-9a and CO-13. 3. In §1, add definition for the term “Rules,” as follows: Rules: The Rules Governing Procurement of Goods, Services, Insurance, and Construction, attached as Attachment 1 to that certain Policy Governing the Procurement of Goods, Services, Insurance, and Construction, and the Disposition of Surplus Materials adopted by the Board of Visitors of the University of Virginia, attached as Exhibit P to that certain Management Agreement dated November 15, 2005, by and between the Commonwealth of Virginia and The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, as amended (Chapters 933 and 943 of the 2006 Acts of Assembly, as amended by Chapters 675 and 685 of the 2009 Acts of Assembly and Chapters 116 and 161 of the 2011 Acts of Assembly). 4. In §2(a), delete the words “Commonwealth of Virginia in its Construction and Professional Services Manual” and insert in their place the words “University of Virginia in its Higher Education Capital Outlay Manual.” 5. In §3(e), delete the words “Building Official for State-owned Buildings” and insert in their place the words “Building Official for the University.” 6. Delete §4(a) and insert the following in its place: (a) §10 of the Rules shall be applicable. It provides as follows: 1 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 2 of 8 1. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the contractor. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. b. The contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, will state that such contractor is an equal opportunity employer. c. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section. 2. The contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b and c in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. 7. Delete §5(a) and insert the following in its place: (a) §11 of the Rules shall be applicable. It provides as follows: “During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor’s employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. 2 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 3 of 8 For the purposes of this section, ‘drug-free workplace’ means a site for the performance of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with these Rules, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the contract.” 8. Delete §8(a) and insert the following in its place: For contracts with a value exceeding one million dollars ($1,000,000), the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a University of Virginia Standard Performance Bond (HECO-10) and Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (Form HECO-10.1), each fully executed by the Contractor and one or more surety companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid. If more than one Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the entire amount of the bond. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner. No payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds have been approved by the Owner and the Office of the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to facilitate review of the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of attorney from the surety company to its agent who executes the bond shall be attached to the bond. 9. In §8(b), delete the references to “§2.2-4337.A.2 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in their place references to “§29(A)(2) of the Rules.” 10. In §8(c), delete the reference to “§2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§30 of the Rules.” 11. In §8(d), delete the reference to “five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000)” and insert in its place a reference to “one million dollars ($1,000,000). 12. In §11(b), delete the reference to “§2.2-4332 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§25 of the Rules.” 13. Delete §11(c) and insert the following in its place: (c) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability, 3 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 4 of 8 Products and Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability, Contractual, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of general liability insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate combined limit. The Commonwealth of Virginia, The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, and their respective officers, employees and agents, shall be named as additional insureds with respect to the Work being procured. The Supplemental General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance policy in a specified amount for the Project. 14. Delete §11(e) and insert the following in its place: (e) The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide occurrence-based liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name the following as additional insureds: The Commonwealth of Virginia, The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia, their respective officers, employees and agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor (where the asbestos work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor). In those cases where only claims-made liability insurance is available, the policy will remain in force throughout the time of the asbestos work and for a minimum of two years beyond the completion of the work without coverage interruption, and if coverage is discontinued within that two year period, the extended reporting period endorsement must be added to the policy to cover the two year requirement beyond work completion. 15. In §12 delete the entire existing section and section title and insert the following in its place: “12. INSURANCE FOR OWNER, UNIVERSITY, AND CM/GC 4 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 5 of 8 (a) The University maintains property insurance on existing buildings (including fire, vandalism, and extended coverage). (b) For all projects the CM/GC, at its cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner, University, and CM/GC, Builders’ Risk Insurance for the total Project in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the construction Contract Price. (c) Builders’ Risk Insurance shall be adjusted as required if the Contract Price changes. (d) Insurance agreements shall include a provision that the University may take occupancy of portions of the Work as it is completed, and prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, and that the Builders’ Risk Insurance provided by the CM/GC shall continue until the University accepts the entire, completed Work, unless alternative insurance coverage has been approved by the University’s Office of Risk Management (i.e. University property coverage of completed and occupied areas). (e) The amount of any deductible must be acceptable to the University. The CM/GC will be liable for any deductible whenever a claim arises. (f) The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner and University, in accordance with its interests, as they may appear. (g) The Owner and University and their officers, employees, and its agents, shall be named as additional insured in any liability policy of insurance issued. (h) Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the University no later than thirty (30) days following the award of the construction phase Contract. In the event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the University. A copy of the policy or certificate of insurance shall be given to the University upon demand. 5 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 6 of 8 (i) The value of the Builders’ Risk Insurance shall include the costs of excavations, backfills, foundations, underground utilities, and site work. (j) The CM/GC and the individual Subcontractors and CM Agency Trade Contractors are responsible for providing any desired coverage for their buildings, equipment, materials, tools, or supplies that are on-site. (k) Any insurance provided through the University on buildings, construction, additions, or renovations will not extend to the CM/GC nor the individual Subcontractors and CM Agency Trade Contractors buildings, equipment, materials, tools, or supplies unless these items are to become property of the Owner upon completion of the Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility for such items at the time of the loss. (l) Subcontractors and CM Agency Trade Contractors are covered under the CM/GC’s Builders’ Risk Insurance policy and need not provide Builders’ Risk Insurance. 16. In §13, delete the last sentence. 17. In §36(d), delete the reference to “§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§26 of the Rules.” 18. Delete §36(i) and insert the following in its place: (i) Interest. (1) Interest shall accrue, at the rate determined pursuant to subsection 2, on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor that remain unpaid after seven (7) days following the payment date. (2) The rate of interest charged the Owner pursuant to subsection 1 shall be the base rate on corporate loans (prime rate) at large United States money center commercial banks as reported daily in the publication entitled The Wall Street Journal. Whenever a split prime rate is published, the lower of the two rates shall be used. However, in no event shall the rate of interest charged exceed the rate of interest established pursuant to §58.11812 of the Code of Virginia. 6 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 7 of 8 (3) Notwithstanding subsection 1, no interest penalty shall be charged when payment is delayed because of disagreement between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or time of delivery of goods or services or the accuracy of any invoice received for the goods or services. The exception from the interest penalty provided by this subsection shall apply only to that portion of a delayed payment that is actually the subject of the disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of the disagreement. (4) This section shall not apply to retainage during the period of time prior to the date the final payment is due. (5) Notwithstanding subsection 1, no interest penalty shall be paid to any debtor on any payment, or portion thereof, withheld pursuant to the Comptroller’s Debt Setoff Program, as authorized by the Virginia Debt Collection Act (§2.2-4800 et seq. of the Code of Virginia), commencing with the date the payment is withheld. If, as a result of an error, a payment or portion thereof is withheld, and it is determined that at the time of setoff no debt was owed to the Commonwealth of Virginia, then interest shall accrue at the rate determined pursuant to subsection 2 on amounts withheld that remain unpaid after seven days following the payment date. (6) These same provisions relating to payment of interest to the Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of interest on any amounts due from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on any claims by the Owner. (7) The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is deemed to be the date of payment to the addressee. 19. In §37, delete the references to §2.2-4354, Code of Virginia” and insert in their place references to “§45 of the Rules.” 20. In §38(a), delete the last sentence in the first paragraph and insert the following in its place: The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the Owner’s designee is limited by §8 of the Rules and any applicable statute. 7 HECO-7 (5/8/13) Page 8 of 8 21. In §38(b), delete the last sentence in the second paragraph and insert the following in its place: Changes to the Contract time and/or Price shall be effective when signed by both parties. 22. In §43(f), delete the reference to “§2.2-4335 of the Code of Virginia” and insert in its place a reference to “§27 of the Rules.” 23. In §47, delete the respective references to §§2.2-4363, 2.2-4364, 2.2-4365 and 2.2-4366 of the Code of Virginia and insert in their place references to §§53, 54, 55 and 56 of the Rules, respectively. 8 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 1. DEFINITIONS 3 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 6 3. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 7 4. NONDISCRIMINATION 9 5. PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS 9 6. TIME FOR COMPLETION 10 7. CONDITIONS AT SITE 11 8. CONTRACT SECURITY 11 9. SUBCONTRACTS 12 10. SEPARATE CONTRACTS 13 11. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE 13 12. "ALL-RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 14 13. TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS 15 14. PATENTS 15 15. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS 15 16. INSPECTION 17 17. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR 19 18. CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES 19 19. SCHEDULE OF THE WORK 20 20. SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT 23 21. ACCESS TO WORK 24 22. SURVEYS AND LAYOUT 24 23. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 24 24. SUBMITTALS 26 1 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 25. FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES 28 26. EQUALS 28 27. AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS 29 28. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS 29 29. STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP 29 30. WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 30 31. USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS 30 32. TEMPORARY ROADS 31 33. SIGNS 31 34. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 31 35. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS 32 36. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR 32 37. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR 36 38. CHANGES IN THE WORK 37 39. EXTRAS 43 40. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT 43 41. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE 43 42. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 44 43. DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME 45 44. INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL INSPECTION 47 45. GUARANTEE OF WORK 48 46. ASSIGNMENTS 50 47. CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES 50 48. ASBESTOS 51 49. TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT 52 50. PROJECT MEETINGS 52 51. SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM) 54 BUSINESS PROCUREMENT PLAN PLEASE NOTE: The CO-7, General Conditions of the Construction Contract, has been created specifically for the use of agencies of the Commonwealth of Virginia, which may not alter any provisions without the express written approval of the Virginia Department of General Services, Division of Engineering and Buildings. The General Conditions have significant legal implications and shall not be altered or modified. Nothing in the CO-7, General Conditions of the Construction Contract, shall be amended or deleted or its intent changed, except by an approved and properly issued Supplemental General Condition. The Commonwealth makes no representation as to their suitability for any other purpose. (Note: Political subdivisions intending to modify the General Conditions for their use should consult with their legal counsel.) 2 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 1. CO-7 DEFINITIONS Whenever used in these General Conditions of the Construction Contract ("General Conditions") or in the Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the singular and plural and the male and female gender thereof: Agency: The Agency, institution or department which is a party to the Contract. For purposes of the Contract, the term Owner shall include such Agency, whether or not the Agency owns the site or the building. Architect, Engineer, Architect/Engineer or A/E: The term used to designate the Architect and/or the Engineer that contracts with the Owner to provide the Architectural and Engineering services for the Project. The A/E is a separate contractor and not an agent of the Owner. The term includes any associates or consultants employed by the A/E to assist in providing the A/E services. Beneficial Occupancy: The condition after Substantial Completion but prior to Final Completion of the Project at which time the Project, or portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and systems operational such that the Owner could, after obtaining necessary approvals and certificates, occupy and utilize the space for its intended use. Guarantees and warranties applicable to that portion of the Work begin on the date the Owner accepts the Project, or a portion thereof, for such Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in the Supplemental General Conditions or by separate agreement. Change Order: A document (Form CO-11) issued on or after the effective date of the Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) which is agreed to by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and which authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Price and/or the Contract Completion Date. The term Change Order shall also include written orders to proceed issued pursuant to Section 38 (a) (3). A Change Order, once signed by all parties, is incorporated into and becomes a part of the Contract. Code of Virginia: 1950 Code of Virginia as amended. Sections of the Code referred to herein are noted by § xx-xx. Construction: The term used to include new construction, reconstruction, renovation, restoration, major repair, demolition and all similar work upon buildings and ancillary facilities, including any draining, dredging, excavation, grading or similar work upon real property. Contract: The Contract Between Owner and Contractor, Form CO-9, hereinafter referred to as the Contract. Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work must be substantially complete. The Contract Completion Date is customarily established in the Notice to Proceed, based on the Time for Completion. In some instances, however, the Contract contains a mandatory Contract Completion Date, which shall be stated in the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal, as applicable. Contract Documents: The Contract between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) signed by the Owner and the Contractor and any documents expressly incorporated therein. Such incorporated documents customarily include the bid submitted by the Contractor, these General Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, any Special Conditions, the plans and the specifications, and all modifications, including addenda and subsequent Change Orders. Contract Price: The total compensation payable to the Contractor for performing the Work, subject to modification by Change Order. Contractor: The person with whom the Owner has entered into a contractual agreement to do the Work on this project. 3 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Date of Commencement: the date as indicated in the written Notice to Proceed, the receipt of the earliest Building Permit, or a date mutually agreed to between the Owner and Contractor in writing, whichever is the latest. Day(s): Calendar day(s) unless otherwise noted. Defective: An adjective which, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of inspections, standards, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, or Work that has been damaged prior to the A/E's recommendation of Final Payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion or Beneficial Occupancy). Drawing: A page or sheet of the Plans which presents a graphic representation, usually drawn to scale, showing the technical information, design, location, and dimensions of various elements of the Work. The graphic representations include, but are not limited to, plan views, elevations, transverse and longitudinal sections, large and small scale sections and details, isometrics, diagrams, schedules, tables and/or pictures. Emergency: Any unforeseen situation, combination of circumstances, or a resulting state that poses imminent danger to health, life or property. Final Completion Date: The date of the Owner's acceptance of the Work from the Contractor upon confirmation from the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor that the Work is totally complete in accordance with Section 44(b). Field Order: A written order issued by the A/E which clarifies or explains the plans or specifications, or any portion or detail thereof, without changing the design, the Contract Price, the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Final Payment: The final payment that the Contractor receives pursuant to the applicable provisions of Section 36, except in the event no final payment is made due to termination of the Contract under either Sections 41 or 42. In the event of a termination for cause under Section 41, the Final Payment shall be when the termination became effective. In the event of a termination for convenience under Section 42, the Final Payment shall be either the payment of compensation for termination that the Contractor receives according to the provisions of Subsection 42, or the Owner’s determination that no compensation for termination is due the Contractor under Subsection 42, as the case may be. Float: The excess time included in a construction schedule to accommodate such items as inclement weather and associated delays, equipment failures, and other such unscheduled events. It is the contingency time associated with a path or chain of activities and represents the amount of time by which the early finish date of an activity may be delayed without impacting the critical path and delaying the overall completion of the Project. Any difference in time between the Contractor's approved early completion date and the Contract Completion Date shall be considered a part of the Project float. Float, Free: The time (in days) by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting upon the start day of any activity following in the chain. Float, Total: The difference (in days) between the maximum time available within which to perform an activity and the duration of an activity. It represents the time by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and disapprovals, required or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any written notice by either party to the Contract shall be sufficiently given by any one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1) delivered by 4 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is due; (2) delivered by hand to the person's authorized agent, representative or officer wherever they may be found; or (3) enclosed in a postage prepaid envelope addressed to such last known business address and delivered to a United States Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such delivery. All notices to the Owner should be directed to the Project Manager. If the Owner and the Contractor agree in writing that Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) or e-mail are acceptable for the Project, such Notice shall be transmitted to the Fax number or e-mail address listed in the agreement and shall have a designated space for the Fax or e-mail Notice recipient to acknowledge his receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax or e-mail Notice with authorized signature acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed or e-mailed back to the sender. The Faxed or e-mailed Notice shall be effective on the date it is acknowledged by authorized signature. All Faxed or e-mailed Notices shall also be sent by hard copy, which shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be effective upon the date of acknowledgment of the Faxed or e-mailed Notice or the date of delivery, whichever occurs first. Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to A/E) fixing the date on which the Contract time will commence for the Contractor to begin the prosecution of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Notice to Proceed will customarily identify a Contract Completion Date. Owner: The public body with whom the Contractor has entered into a contractual agreement and for whom the Work or services is to be provided. The term "Owner", as used herein, shall also mean the Agency. Person: This term includes any individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business, trust, joint venture, or other legal entity. Plans: The term used to describe the group or set of project-specific drawings which are included in the Contract Documents. Project: The term used instead of the specific or proper assigned title of the entire undertaking which includes, but is not limited to, the "Work" described by the Contract Documents. Project Inspector: One or more persons employed by the Owner to inspect the Work for the Owner and/or to document and maintain records of activities at the Site to the extent required by the Owner. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of the appointment of such Project Inspector(s). The scope of the Project Inspector's authority with respect to the Contractor is limited to that indicated in Section 16 (e) and (f) and as supplemented by the Owner in writing to the Project Inspector and to the Contractor. Project Manager: The Project Manager as used herein shall be the Owner's designated representative on the Project. The Project Manager shall be the person through whom the Owner generally conveys written decisions and notices. All notices due the Owner and all information required to be conveyed to the Owner shall be conveyed to the Project Manager. The scope of the Project Manager's authority is limited to that authorized by the Owner, who shall provide written information to the Contractor at the Preconstruction meeting defining those limits. Upon receipt of such information, the Contractor shall be on notice that it cannot rely on any decisions of the Project Manager outside the scope of his authority. Nothing herein shall be construed to prevent the Owner from issuing any notice directly to the Contractor. The Owner may change the Project Manager from time to time and may, in the event that the Project Manager is absent, disabled or otherwise temporarily unable to fulfill his duties, appoint an interim Project Manager. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install ready for its intended use. Schedule of Values: The schedule prepared by the Contractor and acceptable to the Owner which indicates the value of that portion of the Contract Price to be paid for each trade or major component of the Work. 5 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Site: Shall mean the location at which the Work is performed or is to be performed. Specifications: That part of the Contract Documents containing the written administrative requirements and the technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship which describe the proposed Work in sufficient detail and provide sufficient information for the Building Official to determine code compliance and for the Contractor to perform the Work. (The General Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, various bidding information and instructions, and blank copies of various forms to be used during the execution of the Work are usually bound with the Specifications.) Subcontractor: A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of the Work. Subcontractor includes any person who provides on-site labor but does not include any person who only furnishes or supplies materials for the Project. Submittals: All shop, fabrication, setting and installation drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, samples, and other data required by the Contract Documents which are specifically prepared by or for the Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted by the Contractor to illustrate material or equipment conformance of some portion of the Work with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substantial Completion: The condition when the Owner agrees that the Work, or a specific portion thereof, is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that it can be utilized by the Owner for the purposes for which it was intended. The Owner at its sole discretion may, after obtaining the necessary approvals and certificates, take Beneficial Occupancy at this time or choose to wait to occupy until after Final Completion is achieved. Supplemental General Conditions: That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements the General Conditions. Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, material-man or vendor who provides material for the Project but does not provide on-site labor. Time for Completion: The number of consecutive calendar days following the Date of Commencement which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work required by the Contract. Underground Facilities: All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which are or have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. Work: The services performed under this Contract including, but not limited to, furnishing labor, and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction. The Work also includes the entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be provided under the Contract Documents or which may reasonably be expected to be provided as part of a complete, code compliant and functioning system for those systems depicted in the plans and specifications.. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (a) The Contract Between Owner and Contractor (CO-9), the Workers' Compensation Certificate of Coverage (CO-9a), the Standard Performance Bond (CO-10), the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (CO-10.1), the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (CO-12), the Affidavit of Payments of Claims (CO-13), the Contractor's Certificate of Substantial Completion (CO-13.2a), and the Contractor's Certificate of Completion (CO-13.2) issued by the 6 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Commonwealth of Virginia in its Construction and Professional Services Manual are forms incorporated in these General Conditions by reference and are made a part hereof to the same extent as though fully set forth herein. They must be used by the Contractor for their respective purposes. 3. (b) All time limits stated in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Time for Completion of the Work, are of the essence of the Contract. (c) The Contract Between Owner and Contractor shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor in as many original counterparts as may be mutually agreed upon, each of which shall be considered an original. (d) Anything called for by one of the Contract Documents and not called for by the others shall be of like effect as if required or called for by all, except that a provision clearly designed to negate or alter a provision contained in one or more of the other Contract Documents shall have the intended effect. In the event of conflicts among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall take precedence in the following order: the Contract between Owner and Contractor; the Supplemental General Conditions; the General Conditions; the Special Conditions; the specifications with attachments; and the plans. (e) If any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid by any court of competent jurisdiction, such holding shall not invalidate any other provision. (f) All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents related to this Project whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor or others should be identified at the beginning of the document with the eleven digit (XXX-XXXXX-XXX) Project Code Number. Additional identification such as a job number, purchase order number or such may also be shown at the generator's option. LAWS AND REGULATIONS (a) The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work and shall give all notices required thereby. The Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors and tradesmen who perform Work on the project are properly licensed by the Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation as required by Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Articles 1 and 3 and by applicable regulations. (b) This Contract and all other contracts and subcontracts are subject to the provisions of Articles 3 and 5, Chapter 4, Title 40.1, Code of Virginia, relating to labor unions and the "right to work." The Contractor and its Subcontractors, whether residents or nonresidents of the Commonwealth, who perform any Work related to the Project shall comply with all of the said provisions. (c) IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: By signing this Contract, the Contractor certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of this Contract violate the provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits employment of illegal aliens. (d) The provisions of all rules and regulations governing safety as adopted by the Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia and as issued by the Department Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia shall apply to all Work under Inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry shall be granted access to inspection without first obtaining a search or administrative warrant. (e) Building Permit: Because this Project is on Commonwealth of Virginia property, codes or zoning ordinances of local political subdivisions do not apply to Work on the property. The Virginia 7 Safety Codes of Labor and this Contract. the Work for DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Uniform Statewide Building Code applies to the Work and is administered by the Building Official for State-owned Buildings. The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. All other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar assessments imposed by the appropriate political subdivision shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See Section 25 for utility connection fees and services. (f) The Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements in Subsections (a), (b), and (c) of Section 37 of these General Conditions with respect to each lower-tier Subcontractor and Supplier. (g) The Contractor, if not licensed as an asbestos abatement contractor in accordance with §54.1-514, Code of Virginia, shall have all asbestos-related Work performed by subcontractors who are duly licensed as asbestos contractors for the Work required. (h) Lead Based Paint Activities: If the Contract Documents indicate that lead based paint is present on existing materials, components, or surfaces, the Contractor shall conform to the following: (1) The requirements set forth in 59 Federal Register 45,872 (September 2, 1994) Proposed Rule) - Lead; Requirements for Lead based Paint Activities (Proposed Rules) in selecting and performing the means, methods and procedures for performing the Work. This includes, but is not limited to, training of personnel, lead abatement, encapsulation of lead containing materials, removal and handling of lead containing materials, and methods of disposal. When the Final Rule, to be codified at 40 CFR 745, supersedes the Proposed Rule, the Contractor shall be responsible for conforming to the Final Rule, as of the effective date set forth therein. (2) The requirements for employee protection contained in 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart D, and the requirements for record-keeping contained 29 CFR Part 1910. (3) The Virginia Department of Labor and Industry's (DLI) Emergency Regulation published in the May 27, 1996 Virginia Register, requiring, among other things, that a permit be issued to the lead abatement contractor, or any subsequent regulation issued by DLI. (i) If the Contractor violates laws or regulations that govern the Project, the Contractor shall take prompt action to correct or abate such violation and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any fines, and/or penalties that result from such violation. To the extent that such violation is the result of negligence or other actionable conduct of the Contractor, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any third party claims, suits, awards, actions, causes of action or judgments, including but not limited to attorney's fees and costs incurred thereunder, that arise or result from such violation. (j) If the Work includes any land disturbing activities, the Contractor shall have on-site an individual certified by the Department of Conservation and Recreation as a Responsible Land Disturber in accordance with §10.1-563, Code of Virginia. (k) The Contractor is neither required nor prohibited from entering into or adhering to agreements with one or more labor organizations, or otherwise discriminating against subcontractors for becoming or refusing to become, or remaining signatories to or otherwise adhering to, agreements with one or more labor organizations. This section does not prohibit contractors or subcontractors from voluntarily entering into agreements with one or more labor organizations. Both the agency and contractor are entitled to injunctive relief to prevent any violation of this section. This section does not apply to any public-private agreement for any construction in which the private body, as a condition of its investment or partnership with the state agency, requires that the 8 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 private body have the right to control its labor relations policy and perform all work associated with such investment or partnership in compliance with all collective bargaining agreements to which the private party is a signatory and is thus legally bound with its own employees and the employees of its contractors and subcontractors in any manner permitted by the National Labor Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. § 151 et seq., or the Railway Labor Act, 45 U.S.C. § 151 et seq. This section does not prohibit an employer or any other person covered by the National Labor Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act from entering into agreements or engaging in any other activity protected by law. This section shall not be interpreted to interfere with the labor relations of persons covered by the National Labor Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act. 4. NONDISCRIMINATION (a) §2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows: “1. 2. (b) 5. During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. b. The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal opportunity employer. c. Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section. The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b and c in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.” Where applicable, the Virginians with Disabilities Act and the federal Americans with Disabilities Act shall apply to the Contractor and all Subcontractors. PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS (a) §2.2-4312 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows: “During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor's employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. For the purposes of this section, "drug-free workplace" means a site for the performance of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with this chapter, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the contract.” 9 DGS-30-054 (04/13) (b) 6. CO-7 The Contractor shall also establish, maintain and enforce policies which prohibit the following acts by all Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier personnel at the Site: (1) The manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of alcohol, marijuana or other drugs, except possession and medically prescribed use of prescription drugs; and (2) The impairment of judgment or physical abilities due to the use of alcohol, marijuana or other drugs, including impairment from prescription drugs. TIME FOR COMPLETION (a) The Time for Completion shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids, Request for Proposals, or other prebid/proposal documents. In some instances, the Time for Completion may be stated on the Invitation for Bids, Request for Proposals, or other prebid/pre-proposal document in the form of a Contract Completion Date. The Work must be substantially completed by the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) days after the date of Substantial Completion. (b) The Time for Completion shall be stated in the Contract between Owner and Contractor and shall become a binding part of the Contract upon which the Owner may rely in planning the use of the facilities to be constructed and for all other purposes. If the Contractor fails to substantially complete the Work within the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as set forth in the Contract, he shall be subject to payment of actual damages incurred by the Owner or liquidated damages, if provided for in the Contract. (c) The Contractor, in submitting his bid or proposal, acknowledges that he has taken into consideration normal weather conditions. Normal weather does not mean statistically average weather, but rather means a range of weather patterns which might be anticipated based on weather data for the past ten (10) years, (i.e., conditions which are not extremely unusual). Normal weather conditions shall be determined from the public historical records available, including the U.S. Department of Commerce, Local Climatological Data Sheets, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration / Environmental Data and Information Service, National Climatic Center and National Weather Service. The data sheets to be used shall be those for the locality or localities closest to the site of the work. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor because of adverse weather conditions; however, an extension of time for abnormal weather will be considered by the Owner under the following conditions, all of which must be strictly complied with by the contractor: (1) The request for additional time shall be further substantiated by weather data collected during the period of delay at the Site. Said data must demonstrate that an actual departure from normal weather occurred at the Site during the dates in question. (2) The extension requested must be supported by a delay in completion of the entire Project shown on the critical path of the accepted CPM Schedule or the approved bar graph schedule required for the Project. Extensions will be granted only for delays in completion of the Project, not for that portion of any delay which consumes only "float" time. (3) A request for extension of time based on abnormal weather must be made in writing within fourteen (14) calendar days of the completion of the calendar month during which abnormal weather is claimed at the Site. (4) All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical data and the recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be furnished to the Owner before any consideration will be given to the request. That supporting data shall be submitted by the end of the calendar month following the month for which the request is made. 10 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 7. 8. CO-7 (d) The failure by the Contractor to comply with any and all of the conditions in (c) above shall constitute a waiver of claims for the extension of time for abnormal weather. (e) The Contractor represents and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of the bid documents, the Contract Documents, local conditions, availability of materials, equipment, and labor, and any other factors which may affect the performance of the Work. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will achieve Substantial Completion of the Work to allow the Owner to have Beneficial Occupancy not later than the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will achieve Final Completion of the Work (the entire completion of all Work, including "punch list" items), not later than thirty (30) days after achieving Substantial Completion. CONDITIONS AT SITE (a) The Contractor shall have visited the Site prior to bidding or submitting its proposal and is totally responsible for having ascertained pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility and general character of the Site, and the character and extent of existing conditions, improvements and work within or adjacent to the Site. Claims, which result from the Contractor's failure to do so, will be deemed waived. (b) If, in the performance of the Contract, hidden physical conditions of a building being modified are exposed revealing unusual or materially different conditions from those ordinarily encountered or inherent in work of this nature, or if subsurface or latent conditions at the Site are found which are materially different from those frequently present in the locality or from those indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor must report such conditions to the Owner and to the Architect/Engineer before the conditions are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon his own observation of such conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly propose such changes in the Contract Documents as he finds necessary to conform to the different conditions. Any change in the cost of the Work or additional time needed for completion must be requested pursuant to Sections 38, 39 and/or 43 of these General Conditions. (c) If the Contractor, during the course of the Work, observes the existence of any material which he knows, should know, or has reason to believe is hazardous to human health, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner. The Owner will provide the Contractor with instructions regarding the disposition of the material. The Contractor shall not perform any Work involving the material or any Work causing the material to be less accessible prior to receipt of special instructions from the Owner. CONTRACT SECURITY (a) For contracts with a value exceeding five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard Performance Bond, DGS-30-084 (Form CO-10) and a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond, DGS-30-088 (Form CO-10.1) each fully executed by the Contractor and one or more surety companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid or proposal. If more than one Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the entire amount of the bond. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner. No payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds have been approved by the Owner and the Office of the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to facilitate review of the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of attorney from the surety company to its agent who executes the bond shall be attached to the bond, or, if not so attached, prior to the execution of the bonds by the surety, recorded in the Office of the Clerk of Court for the City of Richmond, Virginia, at the John Marshall Court Building, 400 North Ninth 11 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Street, except when the Owner is one of the following, in which case the power of attorney must be recorded with the Clerk of Court in the place shown: 9. OWNER University of Virginia PLACE OF RECORDATION City of Charlottesville Old Dominion University City of Norfolk Norfolk State University City of Norfolk Christopher Newport University City of Newport News Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University County of Montgomery (b) For the purposes of all Standard Labor and Material Payment Bonds entered into, the term "subcontractors" as used in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia is interpreted to mean any contractors who participated in the prosecution of the Work undertaken by the Contractor (referred to in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia as the "prime contractor"), whether such contractor had a direct contract with the Contractor (prime contractor) or whether there were one or more other intervening Subcontractors contractually positioned between it and the Contractor (prime contractor). (c) See § 2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia, for alternative forms of security for payment and/or performance bonds. (d) For contracts with a value of less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor will not be required to provide a Standard Performance Bond and a Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond as described above unless the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal states that such bonds will be required. SUBCONTRACTS (a) The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the Contract, notify the Owner and Architect/Engineer in writing of the names of all Subcontractors proposed for the principal parts of the Work and of such others as the Architect/Engineer may direct. Where the specifications establish qualifications or criteria for Subcontractors, manufacturers, or individuals performing Work on the Project, the Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that those proposed meet the criteria or qualifications. The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that the Owner may, within a reasonable time, object to as unsuitable. Neither the Owner nor the Architect/Engineer shall direct the Contractor to contract with any particular Subcontractor unless provided in the specifications or Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal. (b) The Owner may select a particular Subcontractor for a certain part of the Work and designate on the Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal that the Subcontractor shall be used for the part of the Work indicated and that the Subcontractor has agreed to perform the Work for the subcontract amount stipulated on the bid or Proposal form. The Contractor shall include the stipulated amount plus his Contractor markups in the bid or Proposal. In such case, the Contractor shall be responsible for that Subcontractor and its work and the Subcontractor shall be responsible to the Contractor for its work just as if the Contractor had selected the Subcontractor. If the Contractor has a reasonable objection to the Subcontractor being assigned, then the Contractor shall note the exception in his bid or proposal and the reason for the exception and maintain appropriate provisions for coordinating the work of the Subcontractor. The Owner, at its sole discretion, may accept the Contractor’s bid or proposal with the exception noted and contract separately with the Subcontractor under the provisions Section 10 of the contract or assign a different Subcontractor. 12 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 10. 11. CO-7 (c) The Owner shall, on request, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, the amounts of payments made to the Contractor, the Schedule of Values and Requests for Payment submitted by the Contractor and any other documentation submitted by the Contractor which would tend to show what amounts are due and payable by the Contractor to the Subcontractor. (d) The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of his agents and employees and all succeeding tiers of Subcontractors and Suppliers performing or furnishing any of the Work. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between Owner or Architect/Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Architect/Engineer to pay for or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, except as may otherwise be required by law. (e) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for his invitees at the Site and for those of his Subcontractors, Suppliers, and their employees, including any acts or omissions of such invitees. (f) The Contractor agrees that he alone is responsible for all dealings with his Subcontractors and Suppliers, and their subcontractors, employees and invitees, including, but not limited to, the Subcontractors' or Suppliers' claims, demands, actions, disputes and similar matters unless specifically provided otherwise by the Contract or by statute. SEPARATE CONTRACTS (a) The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Project, the Work under which may proceed simultaneously with the execution of this Contract. The Contractor shall afford other separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work. The Contractor shall cooperate with them and shall take all reasonable action to coordinate his Work with theirs. If the Owner has listed other separate contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal which it expects to proceed simultaneously with the Work of the Contractor, and has included the estimated timing of such other Contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal, the Contractor shall integrate the schedule of those separate contracts into his scheduling. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to assist the Owner in maintaining the schedule for all separate contracts. If the work performed by the separate contractor is defective or performed so as to prevent or threaten to prevent the Contractor from carrying out his Work according to the Contract, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer upon discovering such conditions. (b) If a dispute arises between the Contractor and any separate contractor(s) as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Sections 31 (c) and 31 (d) of these General Conditions, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the respective contractors in proportion to their responsibility. If a Contractor disputes the Owner's apportionment of clean-up costs, it shall be that contractor's burden to demonstrate and prove the correct apportionment. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE (a) The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until he has obtained all the insurance required hereunder from an insurer authorized to do business in Virginia and such insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence Work on his subcontract until the same types of insurance in an appropriate amount have been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Contractor. Approval of insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder. (b) The Contractor shall take out, and shall maintain in force at all times during the performance of the Work, Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance for all of his employees 13 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 engaged in the Work in an amount not less than the minimum required by §§ 2.2-4332 and 65.2100 et seq. of the Code of Virginia. In case any of the Work is sublet, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in the Work. Prior to award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit, on the form provided by the Owner, a Certificate of Coverage verifying Workers' Compensation. The Contractor shall likewise obtain a Certificate of Coverage for Workers' Compensation coverage from each subcontractor prior to awarding the subcontract and shall provide a copy to the Owner. 12. (c) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain commercial general liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability, Products and Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of general liability insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate combined limit. The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, employees and agents, shall be named as an additional insured with respect to the Work being procured. The Supplemental General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance policy in a specified amount for the Project. (d) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain automobile liability insurance which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of automobile insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 combined limit for bodily injury and property damage per occurrence. (e) The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide occurrence-based liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name the following as additional insureds: The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, its employees and its agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor (where the asbestos work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor). "ALL RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE (a) The Contractor, at his cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner and the Contractor "all-risk" builder's risk insurance (or fire, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief insurance, if approved by the Owner and the Director, Division of Engineering and Buildings) upon the entire structure or structures on which the Work of this Contract is to be done and upon all material in or adjacent thereto which is intended for use thereon, to one hundred percent (100%) of the insurable value thereof. Such insurance may include a deductible provision if the Owner so provides in the Supplemental General Conditions, in which case the Contractor will be liable for such deductions, whenever a claim arises. The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in accordance with its interests, as they may appear. The Owner, its officers, employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured in any policy of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the Owner no later than thirty (30) days following the award of the Contract. In the event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of the policy of insurance shall be given to the Owner upon demand. (b) The value of the builder's risk insurance shall exclude the costs of excavations, backfills, foundations, underground utilities and Sitework. 14 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 13. CO-7 (c) The Owner maintains insurance coverage on its buildings. On re-roofing, renovation, and interior modifications of existing building projects where the Owner continues to occupy the building, or a portion thereof, while the Work is being performed, the Contractor shall provide “all risk” builders risk insurance, as described above, in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price for the Work. In those instances, the Contract between the Owner and Contractor for the project shall expressly exclude the project from the requirements of Subsection 12(a). The Contractor is responsible for providing any desired coverage for Contractor's or Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies that are on-site. (d) Any insurance provided through the Department of Treasury, Division of Risk Management, on buildings, construction, additions or renovations will not extend to Contractor's nor Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies unless these items are to become property of the Owner upon completion of the Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility for such items at the time of the loss. TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes, fees, and assessments except the taxes, fees and assessments on the real property comprising the Site of the project. If the State Building Official elects to have the local building official inspect the Work as provided by §36-98.1 of the Code of Virginia, the Owner shall pay the resulting fees to the local building official. 14. PATENTS The Contractor shall obtain all licenses necessary to use any invention, article, appliance, process or technique of whatever kind and shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall hold the Owner, its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any loss or liability for or on account of the infringement of any patent rights in connection with any invention, process, technique, article or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner, unless such invention, process, technique, article or appliance is specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work. If, before using any invention, process, technique, article or appliance specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work, the Contractor has or acquires information that the same is covered by letters of patent making it necessary to secure the permission of the patentee, or other, for the use of the same, he shall promptly advise the Owner and the Architect/Engineer. The Owner may direct that some other invention, process, technique, article or appliance be used. Should the Contractor have reason to believe that the invention, process, technique, article or appliance so specified is an infringement of a patent, and fail to inform the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, he shall be responsible for any loss or liability due to the infringement. 15. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS (a) The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to endeavor to secure the faithful performance by Owner and Contractor of the Work under the Contract. He shall review the Contractor's Submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and return copies to the Contractor with appropriate notations. He shall interpret the requirements of the plans and specifications and issue Field Orders to the Contractor as may be required. He shall recommend to the Owner suspension of the Work (in whole or in part) whenever such suspension may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall have authority to reject, in writing, Work, including material, installation or workmanship, which does not conform to the requirements of the plans and specifications. He shall determine the progress and quality of the Work, subject to the right of the Owner to make an overriding decision to the contrary. Upon request by the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer shall confirm, in writing within fourteen (14) days, any oral order or determination made by him. 15 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (b) The Architect/Engineer shall have no authority to approve or order changes in the Work which alter the design concept or which call for an extension of time or a change in the Contract Price. (c) Although the Owner is bound by the terms of the Contract with the Contractor, including the plans and specifications, the Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to countermand any decision of the Architect/Engineer and to follow or reject the advice of the Architect/Engineer, including but not limited to acceptance of the Work, as it deems best. In those instances where the Architect/Engineer has been given authority to act, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly do so, but in the case of disagreement between the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, the decision of the Owner shall be final. The Contractor shall not be bound by any determination, interpretation or decision of the Architect/Engineer, if it is later determined that the same is not in accord with the Contract Documents. The party taking issue with the determination, interpretation or decision of the Architect/Engineer shall give the other party written notice of such fact within fourteen (14) days after the determination, interpretation or decision is communicated by the Architect/Engineer. In the actual performance of the Work, however, the Contractor shall, in the first instance, proceed in accordance with instructions given by the Architect/Engineer unless the Owner and the Contractor mutually agree that the Contractor shall proceed otherwise. (d) All orders from the Owner to the Contractor shall either be transmitted through the Architect/Engineer or communicated directly to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer by the Owner. (e) Should the Owner choose to employ another or different Architect/Engineer, the status of the Architect/Engineer so employed shall be the same as that of the former Architect/Engineer. (f) The Architect/Engineer will provide to the Owner and the Contractor after each visit to the Site, a written report indicating the date, time of day, weather conditions and the names of the persons representing the Architect/Engineer who participated in the visit. The report will advise the Owner of any problems that were noted and shall compare the Architect/Engineer's observations of the actual progress of the Work with that reported by the Contractor. On the basis of his on-Site observations as Architect/Engineer, he will make every reasonable effort to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. He shall have the authority to inspect the Work, to note and report Defective Work and deviations from the Contract Documents to the Owner, to reject same, and to recommend to the Owner the suspension of the Work when necessary to prevent Defective Work from proceeding or being covered. The Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures (other than those expressly specified in Contract Documents), or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and he shall not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Contractor's own responsibilities. (g) (h) The Architect/Engineer generally conveys written decisions and notices to the Contractor through the Project Manager and shall generally receive information and Notices from the Contractor through the Project Manager unless otherwise agreed. The Owner may delegate from the Architect/Engineer to the Project Manager certain inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection, and administrative duties and authority, but any such delegation shall be in writing and a copy thereof provided to the Contractor. (i) The provisions of this section are included as information only to describe the relationship between the Owner, A/E, and Contractor. No failure of the A/E to act in accordance with this section shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations under the Contract or create any rights in favor of the Contractor. 16 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 16. CO-7 INSPECTION (a) All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and testing by the Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the Project Inspector, authorized inspectors and authorized independent testing entities at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction. The Architect/Engineer and the Owner shall have authority to reject defective material and workmanship and require its correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected and rejected material shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material without charge therefor, and the Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected material from the Site. If the Contractor fails to proceed at once with replacement of rejected material and/or the correction of defective workmanship, the Owner may, by contract or otherwise, replace such material and/or correct such workmanship and charge the cost to the Contractor, or may terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed as provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions, the Contractor and surety being liable for any damage to the same extent as provided in Section 41 for termination thereunder. (b) Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site, which the Contract requires to be performed by independent testing entities, shall be contracted and paid for by the Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete, foundation materials, soil compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and steel framing connections. The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary and convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever such examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or workmanship, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by independent testing entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes, standards, etc., require to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry standards such as Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees are charged for such tests and certifications, they shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay, together with any inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his own purposes, but are not required by the Contract. (c) Where Work is related to or dependent on the Defective Work, the Contractor shall stop such related or dependent Work until the Defective Work or deficiency is corrected or an alternative solution is presented that is satisfactory to the Owner. Where Work is rejected because of defective material or workmanship, the Contractor shall stop like Work in other areas or locations on the Project until the matter is resolved and the Owner has approved corrective measures. (d) Should it be considered necessary or advisable by Owner or the Architect/Engineer at any time before final acceptance of the entire Work to make an examination of any part of the Work already completed, by removing or tearing out portions of the Work, the Contractor shall on request promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and material to expose the Work to be tested to the extent required. If such Work is found to be defective in any respect, due to the fault of the Contractor or his Subcontractors, the Contractor shall bear all the expenses of uncovering the Work, of examination and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such Work is found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the actual cost of the Contractor's labor and material necessarily involved in uncovering the Work, the cost of examination and testing, and Contractor's cost of material and labor necessary for replacement including a markup of fifteen (15%) percent for overhead and profit shall be paid to the Contractor and he shall, in addition, if completion of the Work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses in removing and replacing the Work if the Contractor had covered the Work prior to any inspection or test contrary to the instructions of the A/E, Owner or Project Inspector. 17 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (e) The Project Inspector has the authority to recommend to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner that the Work be suspended when in his judgment the Contract Documents are not being followed. Any such suspension shall be continued only until the matter in question is resolved to the satisfaction of the Owner. The cost of any such Work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor unless it is later determined that no fault existed in the Contractor's Work. (f) The Project Inspector has the right and the authority to: (g) (h) (1) Inspect all construction materials, equipment, and supplies for quality and for compliance with the Contract Documents and/or approved shop drawings and Submittals. (2) Inspect workmanship for compliance with the standards described in the Contract Documents. (3) Observe and report on all tests and inspections performed by the Contractor. (4) Recommend rejection of Work which does not conform to requirements of the Contract Documents. (5) Keep a record of construction activities, tests, inspections, and reports. (6) Attend all joint Site construction meetings and inspections held by the Owner and/or the A/E with the Contractor. (7) Check materials and equipment, together with documentation related thereto, delivered for conformance with approved Submittals and the Contract. (8) Check installations for proper workmanship and conformance with shop drawing and installation instructions. (9) Assist in the review and verification of the CO-12, Schedule of Values & Certificate for Payment, submitted by the Contractor each month. (10) Do all things for or on behalf of the Owner as the Owner may subsequently direct in writing. The Project Inspector has no authority to: (1) Authorize deviations from the Contract Documents; (2) Enter into the area of responsibility of the Contractor's superintendent; (3) Issue directions relative to any aspect of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or in regard to safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work; (4) Authorize or suggest that the Owner occupy the Project, in whole or in part; or (5) Issue a certificate for payment. The duties of the Project Inspector are for the benefit of the Owner only and not for the Contractor. The Contractor may not rely upon any act, statement, or failure to act on the part of the Project Inspector, nor shall the failure of the Project Inspector to properly perform his duties in 18 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 any way excuse Defective Work or otherwise improper performance of the Contract by the Contractor. 17. 18. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR (a) The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent, satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times during the progress of the Work. The superintendent or foreman shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the Owner's inspectors and the Contractor's workers. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and worker health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, of any proposed change in superintendent, including the reason therefor, prior to making such change. (b) The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among the workers on the Project, and shall not employ on the Work, or contract with, any unfit person, anyone not skilled in the Work assigned to him, or anyone who will not work in harmony with those employed by the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the Owner or the Owner's separate contractors and their subcontractors. (c) The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Site any employee or Subcontractor's employee the Owner deems to be incompetent, careless, not working in harmony with others on the Site, or otherwise objectionable, but the Owner shall have no obligation to do so. CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES (a) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for supervising and directing the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract. The Contractor is solely responsible to the Owner that the finished Work complies with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for health and safety precautions and programs for workers and others in connection with the Work. No inspection by, knowledge on the part of, or acquiescence by the Architect or Engineer, the Project Inspector, the Owner, the Owner's employees and agents, or any other entity whatever shall relieve the Contractor from its sole responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract or its sole responsibility for health and safety programs and precautions. (b) If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to Architect/Engineer, subject to the Owner's right to disapprove. The Contractor must submit its written request for the substitution to the Architect/Engineer with sufficient information to allow the Architect/Engineer to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract. 19 DGS-30-054 (04/13) (c) 19. CO-7 The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identification of any drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. SCHEDULE OF THE WORK (a) General: The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and sequencing of the Work, for coordinating the Work, for monitoring the progress of the Work, and for taking appropriate action to keep the Work on schedule. The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date established by the Contract and receive payment in accordance with Section 36 for the Work completed each period. However, the date established by the Contract Documents as the deadline for achieving Substantial Completion must be used in all schedules as the date on which Substantial Completion will be achieved. The time (in days) between the Contractor's planned early completion and the contracted Time for Completion is part of the Project "Total Float" time and will be used as such. Extensions of time pursuant to Sections 38, 39, and 43, damages for delay, and all other matters between the Owner and the Contractor will be determined using the contractually required Substantial Completion date, not an early Substantial Completion date planned by the Contractor. Within two (2) weeks after the Contractor signs the Contract Between Owner and Contractor, unless otherwise extended by the Owner at the time of the signing, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, a preliminary bar graph schedule for accomplishing the Work based upon the Time for Completion stated in the Contract. The preliminary schedule shall be in sufficient detail to show the sequencing of the various trades for each floor level, wing or work area. The Owner will notify the Contractor of its acceptance of or objections to the preliminary schedule within fifteen (15) days of receipt by the Owner. A fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work must be submitted in like manner no later than sixty (60) days after the Contract is signed by the Owner. The Owner's failure to reject or its acceptance of any schedule, graph, chart, recovery schedule, updated schedule, plan of action, etc. shall not constitute a representation or warranty by the Owner, including but not limited to a representation or warranty that the schedule is feasible or practical nor shall any such acceptance or failure to reject relieve the Contractor from sole responsibility for completing the Work within the time allowed. No progress payments will be payable to the Contractor until after it has submitted a preliminary schedule which is acceptable to the Owner. Neither the second progress payment nor any subsequent payment shall be payable to the Contractor until it has submitted a fully complete Project schedule accepted by the Owner. Nor shall subsequent progress payments be payable to the Contractor unless and until he submits the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by Section 19(d) herein or unless and until he provides any recovery schedule pursuant to Section 19(e) herein. Failure to provide a satisfactory preliminary or fully complete Project schedule within the time limits stated above shall be a breach of contract for which the Owner may terminate the Contract in the manner provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions. The fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work shall be of the type set forth in subparagraph (1) or (2) below, as appropriate: (1) For Contracts with a price of $1,500,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy the above requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of the work. See (b) below. 20 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (2) (b) For Contracts with a price over $1,500,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule shall be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the Work. The CPM schedule shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c) below. Bar Graph Schedule: Where a bar graph schedule is required, it shall be time-scaled in weekly increments, shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of the Work by trade and by area, level, or zone, and shall schedule dates for all salient features, including but not limited to the placing of orders for materials, submission of shop drawings and other Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, the manufacture and delivery of material, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used. It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim deadlines established by the Contract. (c) CPM Schedule: Where a CPM schedule is required, it shall be in the time-scaled precedence format using the Contractor's logic and time estimates. The CPM schedule shall be drawn or plotted with activities grouped or zoned by Work area or subcontract as opposed to a random (or scattered) format. The CPM schedule shall be time-scaled on a weekly basis and shall be drawn or plotted at a level of detail and logic which will schedule all salient features of the Work, including not only the actual construction Work for each trade, but also the submission of shop drawings and other Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, placing of orders for materials, the manufacture and delivery of materials, the testing and installation of materials and equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor. Failure to include any element of Work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all Work required within the Time for Completion, Contract Completion Date and any interim deadlines established by the Contract. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used. It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim deadlines established by the Contract. When completed, the CPM schedule shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner for review. The CPM schedule will identify and describe each activity, state the duration of each activity, the calendar dates for the early and late start and the early and late finish of each activity, and clearly highlight all activities on the critical path. "Total float" and "free float" shall be indicated for all activities. Float time, whether "free float" or "total float" as defined in Section 1, shall not be considered for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor, but must be allocated in the best interest of completing the Work within the Time for Completion or 21 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 the Contract Completion Date. Extensions to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, when granted by Change Order, will be granted only when equitable time adjustment exceeds the Total Float in the activity or path of activities affected by the change provided that the Owner has reasonably provided information necessary to allow for the orderly progression of the Work. On contracts with a price over $5,000,000, the CPM schedule shall also show what part of the Contract Price (expressed in U.S. dollars) is attributable to each activity on the schedule and shall be in agreement with the schedule of values, the sum of which for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price. The CPM schedule shall have no line-item activities longer than thirty (30) days in duration, and activities shall be included to provide sufficient detail for effectively managing the sequence of the Work. When acceptable to the Owner and Architect/Engineer as to compliance with the requirements of this Section, the schedule shall become the CPM schedule for the Project. Acceptance of the schedule by the Owner does not indicate agreement with, nor responsibility for the proposed or actual duration of any activity or logic shown on the accepted schedule. (d) Monthly Project Reports: The Contractor shall review progress not less than each month, but as often as necessary to properly manage the Project and stay on schedule. The Contractor shall collect and preserve information on Change Orders, including extensions of time. The Contractor shall evaluate this information and update the latest accepted schedule as often as necessary to finish within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall submit to the A/E along with his monthly request for payment a copy of the bar graph schedule annotated to show the current progress. For projects requiring a CPM schedule, the Contractor shall submit a monthly report of the status of all activities. The bar graph schedule or monthly status report submitted with each periodic request for payment shall show the Work completed to date in comparison with the Work scheduled for completion, including but not limited to the dates for the beginning and completion of the placing of orders; the manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. The form shall be approved by the A/E and the Owner; however, a bar graph or a CPM schedule marked, colored or annotated to reflect the above will usually satisfy this requirement. If any elements of the Work are behind schedule, regardless of whether they may prevent the Work from being completed on time, the Contractor must indicate in writing in the report what measures he is taking and plans to take to bring each such element back on schedule and to ensure that the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date is not exceeded. (e) Progress Delay: Should any of the following conditions exist, the Owner may require the Contractor to prepare, at no extra cost to the Owner, a plan of action and a recovery schedule for completing the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date: (1) The Contractor's monthly project report indicates delays that are, in the opinion of the A/E or the Owner, of sufficient magnitude that the Contractor's ability to complete the Work by the scheduled Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is brought into question; (2) The CPM schedule sorted by early finish shows the Contractor to be thirty (30) or more days behind the critical path schedule at any time during construction up to thirty (30) days prior to scheduled Substantial Completion date; (3) The Contractor desires to make changes in the logic (sequencing of Work) or the planned duration of future activities of the CPM schedule which, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, are of a major nature. The plan of action and recovery schedule, when required, shall explain and display how the Contractor intends to regain compliance with the current accepted, fully completed, Project CPM schedule, as updated by approved change orders. 22 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 The plan of action, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner for review within two (2) business days of the Contractor receiving the Owner's written demand. The recovery schedule, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner within five (5) calendar days of the Contractor's receiving the Owner's written demand. (f) Early Completion of Project: The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. However, such planned early completion shall be for the Contractor's convenience only and shall not create any additional rights of the Contractor or obligations of the Owner under this Contract, nor shall it change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall not be required to pay damages to the Owner because of its failure to achieve Substantial Completion by its planned earlier date. Likewise, the Owner shall not pay the Contractor any additional compensation for achieving Substantial Completion early nor will the Owner owe the Contractor any compensation should the Owner, its officers, employees, or agents cause the Contractor not to achieve Substantial Completion earlier than the date required by the Contract Documents. If the Contractor seeks to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to reflect an earlier completion date, he may request or propose such a change. The Owner may, but is not required to, accept such proposal. However, a change in the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall be accomplished only by Change Order. If the Contractor's proposal to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is accepted, a Change Order will be issued stating that all references in the Contract, including these General Conditions, to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall thereafter refer to the date as modified, and all rights and obligations, including the Contractor's liability for actual damages, delay damages and/or liquidated damages, shall be determined in relation to the date, as modified. 20. SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT (a) Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a schedule of the estimated values listed by trades or by specification sections of the Work, totaling the Contract Price. Where the total project has multiple parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate schedules of values to facilitate reviews and justifications for payments. All requests for payment shall be made in the ASTM Uniformat II structure on the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) pages 1 and 2. Succeeding pages may be on the Form CO-12 continuation sheets or a computerized spreadsheet which is in the same format and which contains the same information. Where a computerized spreadsheet is used, one copy of the entire Schedule of Values shall be provided to the Owner in an agreed electronic format (e.g. EXCEL) with the initial request for payment. (b) If the Contractor requests, or intends to request, payment for materials stored in an approved and secure manner, the Schedule of Values must indicate the amount for labor and the amount for materials, and in a supplement thereto must include an itemized list of materials for that trade or Work section. The material breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow verification of the quantities required for the Project, the quantities delivered, the Work completed, and the quantities stored on or off Site. (c) The "Value of Work Completed" portion of the Form CO-12 shall be completed, the Contractor's certification completed and signed, and the appropriate substantiating material attached to each Certificate for Payment (CO-12). Such substantiating material includes, but is not limited to, invoices for materials, delivery tickets, time sheets, payroll records, daily job logs/records, and 23 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 similar materials which, in the opinion of the Owner and the A/E, are necessary or sufficient to justify payment of the amount requested. 21. (d) The labor progress for any task or activity shall be calculated based upon the percentage of Work complete up to fifty percent (50%) of the completion of the task or activity. Thereafter, the evaluation of labor progress will be based upon the effort required to complete that task or activity. The material progress shall be calculated as the invoiced dollar cost of materials used in relationship to the amount estimated as necessary to complete a particular element of Work. When calculating material progress, credit shall be given for installed material as well as that stored on the Site and any material stored off Site which has been certified by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions. (e) Should Work included in previous Form CO-12 submittals, and for which payment has been made, subsequently be identified, by tests, inspection, or other means, as not acceptable or not conforming to Contract requirements, the "Value of Work Completed" portion of the first Form CO-12 submitted after such identification shall be modified to reduce the "completed" value of that Work by deleting the value of that which has been identified as not acceptable or nonconforming. ACCESS TO WORK The Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Manager, the Owner's inspectors and other testing personnel, inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry, and others authorized by the Owner, shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for access and inspection. 22. 23. SURVEYS AND LAYOUT (a) The Owner shall furnish the Contractor all necessary documents showing property lines and the location of existing buildings and improvements. The Contractor shall provide competent surveying and engineering services to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract and shall be responsible for the accuracy of these surveying and engineering services. (b) The Owner shall provide such general reference points and benchmarks on the Site as will enable the Contractor to proceed with the Work will be established in the plans and specifications. If the Contractor finds that any previously established reference points have been lost or destroyed, he shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer. (c) The Contractor shall protect and preserve the established benchmarks and monuments and shall make no changes in locations without written notice to the Architect/Engineer and the written approval from the Owner. Any of these which may be lost or destroyed or which require shifting because of necessary changes in grades or locations shall, subject to prior written approval of the Owner, be replaced and accurately located by the Contractor. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS (a) The general character and scope of the Work are illustrated by the plans and the specifications. If the Contractor deems additional detail or information to be needed, he shall request the same in writing from the Architect/Engineer. His request shall precisely state the detail or information needed and shall explain why it is needed. The Contractor shall also indicate a date when the requested information is required. The Architect/Engineer shall provide by Field Order such further detail and information as is necessary by the date required so long as the date indicated is reasonable. Any additional drawings and instructions supplied to the Contractor shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, shall be true developments thereof, and shall be so prepared that they can be reasonably interpreted as a part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in 24 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 accordance with the additional detail drawings and instructions at no additional cost or time to the Owner. (b) If the Contractor finds a conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy in the plans or specifications, he shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing as soon as possible, but before proceeding with the affected Work. The Architect/Engineer shall issue a clarification by Field Order to the Contractor stating the correct requirements. If the Contractor deems the Field Order requires additional Work, he shall notify the A/E of such prior to proceeding with that Work and he shall submit a request for Change Order along with a detailed substantiating cost proposal through the A/E to the Owner within fourteen (14) calendar days. If such conflict, error, omission or other discrepancy in plans or specifications was reasonably apparent or with reasonable diligence should have been apparent to the Contractor prior to submitting its bid or Proposal, and the Contractor failed to submit questions to the A/E in the time and manner required by the Instructions to Bidders or Request for Proposal, then any claims shall be deemed waived and the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or time, or entitled to sue the Owner based on such conflict, error, omission or other discrepancy. If the Contractor performs any Work, or is delayed in performing any Work, where such Work involves a conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy in the plans and specifications that the Contractor knew about, or with reasonable diligence should have known about, and fails to notify the A/E and Owner as required, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such performance or delay and shall bear all costs attributable to correcting any Work requiring correction or to any delay, and such conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy shall not be the basis for a claim, cause of action or right to sue the Owner. (c) In case of differences between small and large scale drawings, the large scale drawings shall govern. Where on any of the drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall apply also to all other like portions of the Work. (d) Where the word "similar" appears on the drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and not as meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their connection with other parts of the Work. (e) The specifications are divided into several parts, or sections, for convenience only, since the entire specifications must be considered as a whole. The divisions of the specifications are not intended to control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to limit the Work performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of the trades, Subcontractors and vendors engaged in the Work and for the compensation of the trades, Subcontractors and vendors for the Work performed. (f) Measurements or dimensions shown on the drawings for Site features, utilities and structures shall be verified at the Site by the Contractor before commencing the Work. The Contractor shall not scale measurements or dimensions from the drawings. If there are discrepancies, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. If new Work is to connect to, match with or be provided in existing Work, the Contractor shall verify the actual existing conditions and necessary dimensions prior to ordering or fabrication. (g) As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the Site for the Owner one copy of all drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop or setting drawings, Change Orders and other modifications (collectively referred to herein as "As-Built Drawings") in good order and marked to record all changes as they occur during construction. These shall be available to the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Inspector, the Owner's other inspectors and to the Owner's testing personnel. The drawings shall be neatly and clearly marked in color during construction to record all variations made during construction. The representation of such variations shall include such supplementary notes, symbols, legends, and details as may be necessary to clearly show the as-built construction. 25 DGS-30-054 (04/13) (h) 24. CO-7 Record Drawings: Upon completion of the Work and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer, for preparation of the Record Drawings, one complete set of "As-Built Drawings" referred to in the preceding subsection. SUBMITTALS (a) The Contractor shall submit a listing of all Submittals required by the Architect/Engineer or which the Contractor identifies as necessary, fixing the dates for the submission of shop or setting drawings, samples and product data. The listing shall be in a format acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall identify all Submittals with the Owner's Project Code Number as required by Section 2(f). (b) Submittals shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for approval if required by the specifications or if requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. No part of the Work dealt with by a Submittal shall be ordered, fabricated or installed by the Contractor, save at his own risk, until such approval has been given. Working drawings, shop drawings and/or submittals for fire protection, fire alarm, fire detection and security systems shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Building Official prior to ordering, fabricating or installing such systems. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining such approval. No part of the Work involving such systems shall be ordered, fabricated or installed by the Contractor until such approval has been obtained. (c) The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer for approval the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other identifying data and information respecting the performance, capacity, nature and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment which the Contractor contemplates incorporating in the Work. When Submittals are required by this Contract for materials, the Contractor shall furnish full information concerning the material or articles which he contemplates incorporating in the Work. When required, samples shall be submitted for approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery, equipment, material and articles installed or used without required approval shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. (d) Unless otherwise indicated or required elsewhere in the specifications, shop drawings shall be submitted in the form of one reproducible tracing and three blue line or black line prints. Catalog cuts, product data and other non-reproducible literature, except certificates, shall be submitted in six (6) copies minimum, of which three (3) will be retained by the Architect/Engineer and the remainder will be returned to the Contractor. As is mutually agreeable to the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor, Submittals may be provided in electronic format in lieu of hardcopy format. (e) Submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal which shall list the Project Code Number, the Submittals included, the specification section number applicable to each, and the date shown on each Submittal. Submittals shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. Each Submittal shall be clearly marked to show each item, component and/or optional feature proposed to be incorporated into the Project. Cross reference to the plans or specifications as needed to identify the use for which the item or component is intended. (f) The Contractor shall check the Submittals for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clearly note in writing any and all items which deviate from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Reasons for deviation shall be included with the Submittal. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for checking all dimensions and coordinating all materials and trades to ensure that the components or products proposed, individually or in 26 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 combination, will fit in the space available and that they will be compatible with other components or products provided. (g) After checking each submittal, the Contractor shall stamp each sheet of the Submittal with the Contractor's review stamp. Data submitted in a bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides, may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only. The Contractor's review stamp shall be worded as follows: The equipment and material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract drawings and specifications unless otherwise shown in bold face type or lettering and listed on a page or pages headed "DEPARTURES FROM DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS", and can be installed in the allocated spaces. Reviewed by _______________________________________ Date ____________________ The person signing the review stamp shall be the person designated in writing by the Contractor as having that authority. (A copy of such designation shall be forwarded to the A/E prior to or with the first Submittal.) The signature on the stamped review statement shall be handwritten in ink, or in the case of electronic submittals, electronically signed in accordance with §59.1-479 et seq. of the Code of Virginia. Stamped signatures are not acceptable. (h) The Contractor shall forward all Submittals sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to allow reasonable time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking. (i) If a Submittal indicates a departure from the Contract requirements, the Architect/Engineer may reject the Submittal or, if he deems it to have merit, may recommend it to the Owner, who shall approve or reject it as the Owner, in its sole discretion, sees fit. The departure from the Contract requirements shall be further authorized by a Change Order, if a reduction or increase in the Contract Price is appropriate. (j) The Architect/Engineer is responsible to the Owner, but not to the Contractor, to verify that the Submittals conform to the design concept and functional requirements of the plans and specifications, that the detailed design portrayed in shop drawings and proposed equipment and materials shown in Submittals are of the quality specified and will function properly, and that the Submittals comply with the Contract Documents. (k) The Work shall be in accordance with approved Submittals. Approval of the Contractor's Submittals by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of complying with the Contract and all drawings and specifications, except as changed by Change Order. (l) The plans and/or specifications may indicate that the Architect/Engineer designed or detailed a portion of the plans around a particular product (most commonly a piece of equipment). Should a different product be proposed by the Contractor and accepted, all modifications, rerouting, relocations and variations required for proper installation and coordination to comply with the design concept and requirements of the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. If the plans were noted as designed or detailed around a particular product and/or if a product is named when a "brand name or equal" specification has been used, this is not intended to favor or preclude the use of other products pursuant to Section 26 of these General Conditions. Rather such design merely acknowledges the reality that in many instances the Architect/Engineer must have a basis to design and detail around for dimensions and characteristics of a product or system. (m) Additional Submittal requirements are shown in the specifications. 27 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 25. 26. CO-7 FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES (a) The Contractor shall obtain all permits, except the Building Permit, and pay for all fees and charges necessary for temporary access and public right-of-way blockage or use, for temporary connections to utilities and for the use of property (other than the Site) for storage of materials and other purposes unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. (b) Certain projects such as renovations and interior modifications of existing buildings will usually have water and electric service to the building. In those instances, water and electric power, if required for the Work under the Contract, will be furnished by the Owner subject to reasonable use by the Contractor, only to the extent and capacity of present services. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing required connections, temporary wiring, piping, etc. to these services in a safe manner and in accordance with applicable codes. All temporary wire, pipe, etc. shall be removed before the Substantial Completion inspection. Acceptance by the Contractor of the use of Owner's water and electricity constitutes a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to the Contractor for whatever damages which may result from power and water outages or voltage variations. (c) The Owner shall pay any connection charges for permanent utility connections directly to the utility Supplier. The Contractor shall coordinate such connections with the utility Supplier. (d) It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, either directly or through his Subcontractors, shall provide and pay for all material, labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, telephone and other services or facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute completely and deliver the Work within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date. (e) The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities including Contractor’s office space, Owner’s Project Inspector office space (if required by the specifications), toilet facilities, and storage space, as required for the operations and the protection of the material and work. Number, sizes and locations shall be subject to approval of the Owner. Sanitary facilities shall be plumbed into an approved waste treatment system or shall be an approved type of chemical toilet and shall be regularly serviced. EQUALS (a) Brand names: Unless otherwise stated in the specifications, the name of a certain brand, make or manufacturer denotes the characteristics, quality, workmanship, economy of operation and suitability for the intended purpose of the article desired, but does not restrict the Contractor to the specific brand, make, or manufacturer; it is set forth to convey to the Contractor the general style, type, character and quality of the article specified. (b) Equal materials, equipment or assemblies: Whenever in these Contract Documents, a particular brand, make of material, device or equipment is shown or specified, such brand, make of material, device or equipment shall be regarded merely as a standard. Any other brand, make or manufacturer of a product, assembly or equipment which in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer is the equal of that specified, considering quality, capabilities, workmanship, configuration, economy of operation, useful life, compatibility with design of the Work, and suitability for the intended purpose, will be accepted unless rejected by the Owner as not being equal. (c) Substitute materials, equipment or assemblies: The Contractor may propose to substitute a material, product, equipment, or assembly which deviates from the requirements of the Contract 28 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Documents but which the Contractor deems will perform the same function and have equal capabilities, service life, economy of operations, and suitability for the intended purpose. The proposal must include any cost differentials proposed. The Owner will have the A/E provide an initial evaluation of such proposed substitutes and provide a recommendation on acceptability and indicate the A/E's redesign fee to incorporate the substitution in the design. If the proposed substitute is acceptable to the Owner, a Change Order will be proposed to the Contractor to accept the substitute and to deduct the cost of the A/E redesign fee and the proposed cost savings from the Contract Price. The Owner shall have the right to limit or reject substitutions at its sole discretion. (d) 27. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all changes in the Work necessary to adapt and accommodate any equal or substitute product which it uses. The necessary changes shall be made at the Contractor's expense. AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS If a brand name, product, or model number included in the Contract Documents is not available on the present market, alternate equal products or model numbers may be proposed by the Contractor through the Architect/Engineer for approval by the Owner. 28. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor or Supplier, subject to any security interest, installment or sales contract or any other agreement or lien by which an interest is retained by the seller or is given to a secured party. The Contractor warrants that he has clear and good title to all materials and supplies which he uses in the Work or for which he accepts payment in whole or in part. 29. STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP (a) Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, all equipment, material, and accessories incorporated in the Work are to be new and in first class condition. (b) Unless specifically approved by the Owner or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall not incorporate into the Work any materials containing asbestos or any material known by the industry to be hazardous to the health of building construction workers, maintenance workers, or occupants. If the Contractor becomes aware that a material required by the Contract contains asbestos or other hazardous materials, he shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately and shall take no further steps to acquire or install any such material without first obtaining Owner approval. (c) All workmanship shall be of the highest quality found in the building industry in every respect. All items of Work shall be done by craftsmen or tradesmen skilled in the particular task or activity to which they are assigned. In the acceptance or rejection of Work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. Poor or inferior workmanship (as determined by the Architect/Engineer, the Owner or other inspecting authorities) shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense such that the Work conforms to the highest quality standards of the trades concerned, or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or other inspecting authority, as applicable. (d) Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where specified items are supplied with the manufacturer's printed instructions, recommendations, or directions for installation, or where such instructions, recommendations, or directions are available, installation of the specified items shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions unless those instructions 29 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 contradict the plans or specifications, in which case the Architect/Engineer will be notified for an interpretation and decision. 30. 31. (e) Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where reference is made to specific codes or standards governing the installation of specified items, installation shall in all cases be in strict accordance with the referenced codes and standards. Where no reference is made to specific codes or standards, installation shall conform to the generally recognized applicable standards for firstclass installation of the specific item to be installed. Contractors are expected to be proficient and skilled in their respective trades and knowledgeable of the Codes and Standards of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Electric Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and other codes and standards applicable to installations and associated work by his trade. (f) Where the manufacturer's printed instructions are not available for installation of specific items, where specific codes or standards are not referenced to govern the installation or specific items, or where there is uncertainty on the part of the Contractor concerning the installation procedures to be followed or the quality of workmanship to be maintained in the installation of specific items, the Contractor shall consult the Architect/Engineer for approval of the installation procedures or the specific standards governing the quality of workmanship the Contractor proposes to follow or maintain during the installation of the items in question. (g) During and/or at the completion of installation of any items, the tests designated in the plans or specifications necessary to assure proper and satisfactory functioning for its intended purpose shall be performed by the Contractor or by its Subcontractor responsible for the completed installation. All costs for such testing are to be included in the Contract Price. If required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish prior to final inspection the manufacturers' certificates evidencing that products meet or exceed applicable performance, warranty and other requirements, and certificates that products have been properly installed and tested. WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP (a) The Contractor warrants that, unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work under the Contract shall be new, in first class condition, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor further warrants that all workmanship shall be of the highest quality and in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be performed by persons qualified at their respective trades. (b) Work not conforming to these warranties shall be considered defective. (c) This warranty of materials and workmanship is separate and independent from and in addition to any of the Contractor's other guarantees or obligations in the Contract or under Virginia law. USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS (a) The Contractor shall: (1) Perform the Work in such a manner as not to interrupt or interfere with the operation of any existing activity on, or in proximity to, the Site or with the Work of any other separate contractor; (2) Store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at the Site of the Work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his Work or the work of any other separate contractor; and 30 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (3) Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. (b) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to effect all cutting, filling or patching of the Work required to make the same conform to the plans and specifications, and, except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer, not to cut or otherwise alter the Work of any other separate contractor. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or Site, including existing improvements, unless called for by the Contract. (c) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to clean up frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his operations, to the end that at all times the Site shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance. No such refuse, rubbish, scrap material and debris shall be left within the completed Work nor buried on the building Site, but shall be removed from the Site and properly disposed of in a licensed landfill or otherwise as required by law. (d) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), before Final Payment or such prior time as the Owner may require, to remove all surplus material, false Work, temporary structures, including foundations thereof, plants of any description and debris of every nature resulting from his operations and to put the Site in a neat, orderly condition; to thoroughly clean and leave reasonably dust free all finished surfaces including all equipment, piping, etc., on the interior of all buildings included in the Contract; and to clean thoroughly all glass installed under the Contract, including the removal of all paint and mortar splatters and other defacements. If the Contractor fails to clean up at the time required herein, the Owner may do so and charge the costs incurred thereby to the Contractor in accordance with Section 10 (b) of these General Conditions. (e) 32. The Contractor shall have, On-Site, an employee certified by the Department of Conservation and Recreation as a Responsible Land Disturber who shall be responsible for the installation, inspection and maintenance of erosion control and stormwater management measures and devices. The Contractor shall prevent Site soil erosion, the runoff of silt and/or debris carrying water from the Site, and the blowing of debris off the Site in accordance with the applicable requirements and standards of the Contract and the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation's Erosion and Sediment Control Regulations and the Virginia Stormwater Management Regulations. TEMPORARY ROADS Temporary roads, if required, shall be established and maintained until permanent roads are accepted, then removed and the area restored to the conditions required by the Contract Documents. Crushed rock, paving and other road materials from temporary roads shall not be left on the Site unless permission is received from the Owner to bury the same at a location and depth approved by the Owner. 33. SIGNS The Contractor may, at his option and without cost to the Owner, erect signs acceptable to the Owner on the Site for the purpose of identifying and giving directions to the job. No signs shall be erected without prior approval of the Owner as to design and location. 34. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 31 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 35. CO-7 (a) The Contractor expressly undertakes, both directly and through his Subcontractors, to take every reasonable precaution at all times for the protection of all persons and property which may come on the Site or be affected by the Contractor's Work. (b) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Any violation of these requirements or duties or any potential safety hazard that is brought to the attention of the Contractor by the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or any other persons shall be immediately abated. (c) The provisions of all rules and regulations governing health and safety as adopted by the Safety Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia, issued by the Department of Labor and Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia, shall apply to all Work under this Contract. (d) The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his Work from damage and shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except as may be directly and solely due to errors in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner. The Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property to prevent any damage to it or loss of use and enjoyment by its owners. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection as required by public authority, local conditions, or the Contract. (e) In an emergency affecting the health, safety or life of persons or of the Work, or of the adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, shall act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Also, should he, to prevent threatened loss or injury, be instructed or authorized to act by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, he shall so act immediately, without appeal. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of any emergency work shall be determined as provided by Section 38 of these General Conditions. (f) When necessary for the proper protection of the Work, temporary heating of a type approved by the Architect/Engineer must be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, unless otherwise specified. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS The Contractor shall suspend activity on and protect any portion of the Work that may be subject to damage by climatic conditions. 36. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR (a) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Owner will make partial payments to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment, Form CO-12, showing the estimate of the Work performed during the preceding calendar month or work period, as recommended by the Architect/Engineer. When evaluating the Contractor's Form CO-12, the Architect/Engineer will consider the value of the Work in place, the value of approved and properly stored materials, the status of the Work on the critical path with regard to the Time for Completion, and the estimated value of the Work necessary to achieve Final Completion. The Architect/Engineer will schedule a monthly pay meeting to occur no earlier than the 25th day of the month represented by the payment request or not later than the 5th day of the following month. The Contractor shall submit his monthly estimate of Work completed on Form CO-12 in accordance with the Contract between the Owner and Contractor so that it is received by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Project Manager at least one work day prior to the date scheduled by the Architect/Engineer for the monthly pay meeting. The Owner will review the estimate with the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, and may approve any or all of the estimate of Work for payment. In 32 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 preparing estimates, the material delivered to the Site and preparatory Work done shall be taken into consideration, if properly documented as required by Section 20 of these General Conditions, or as may be required by the Architect/Engineer so that quantities may be verified. In addition to material delivered to the Site, material such as large pieces of equipment and items purchased specifically for the Project, but stored off the Site within the Commonwealth of Virginia, may be considered for payment, provided all of the following are accomplished prior to the submission of the monthly payment request in which payment for such materials is requested: (1) The Contractor must notify the Owner in writing, at least ten (10) days prior to the submission of the payment request, through the Architect/Engineer, that specific items will be stored off Site in a designated, secured place within the Commonwealth of Virginia. The Schedule of Values must be detailed to indicate separately both the value of the material and the labor/installation for trades requesting payment for stored materials. By giving such notification and by requesting payment for material stored off Site, the Contractor warrants that the storage location is safe and suitable for the type of material stored and that the materials are identified as being the property of the Contractor, and agrees that loss of materials stored off the Site shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to timely furnish these types and quantities of materials for the Project and meet the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, subject to Section 43 (b) of these General Conditions. If the storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site, the Contractor may be required to reimburse the Owner for the cost incurred for travel to the storage location to verify the Contractor's request for payment for materials stored off Site. (2) Such notification, as well as the payment request, shall: (a) Itemize the quantity of such materials and document with invoices showing the cost of said materials; (b) Indicate the identification markings used on the materials, which shall clearly reference the materials to the particular project; (c) Identify the specific location of the materials, which must be within reasonable proximity to the Site and within the Commonwealth of Virginia; (d) Include a letter from the Contractor's Surety which confirms that the Surety on the Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond has been notified of the request for payment of materials stored off the Site and agrees that the materials are covered by the bond; and (e) Include a certificate of all-risk builder's risk insurance in an amount not less than the fair market value of the materials, which shall name the Owner and the Contractor as co-insureds. (3) The Architect/Engineer shall indicate, in writing, to the Owner that Submittals for such materials have been reviewed and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, that the stored materials meet the requirement of the plans and specifications, and that such materials conform to the approved Submittals. Should the A/E deem it necessary to visit the storage site to make such review, the Contractor shall bear the costs incurred therewith. (4) The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, shall notify the Contractor in writing of its agreement to prepayment for such materials. 33 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (5) The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing, through the Architect/Engineer, when the materials are to be transferred to the Site and when the materials are received at the Site. (b) Payment will not be made for materials or equipment stored on or off the Site which are not scheduled for incorporation into the Work within the six months next following submission of the request for payment, unless the Contractor has the prior consent of the Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld by the Owner in its discretion if, in the opinion of the Owner, it is not necessary to procure the materials more than six months in advance of use to assure their availability when needed. (c) No payment shall be made to the Contractor until: (1) The Contractor furnishes to the Owner its Social Security Number (SSN) if an individual, or its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) if a proprietorship, partnership, corporation or other legal entity. (2) Certificates of Insurance or other satisfactory evidence of compliance by the Contractor with all the requirements of Section 11 (and Section 12 if applicable) of these General Conditions have been delivered to the Owner. (3) Copies of any certificates of insurance required of a Subcontractor under Section 11 have been delivered to the Owner for payments based on Work performed by a Subcontractor. (4) The Contractor has (i) submitted a preliminary schedule which is acceptable to the Owner in accordance with Section 19(a), (ii) submitted a fully complete Project schedule accepted by the Owner in accordance with Section 19(a), (iii) maintained the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by Section 19(d), or (iv) provided a recovery schedule pursuant to Section 19(e), as each of them may be required. (d) In making such partial payments, five percent (5%) of each payment to the Contractor shall be retained until Final Completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract, unless otherwise provided by any law, regulation or program of the federal government. Such retainage shall be held to assure faithful performance of the Contract and may also be used as a fund to deduct amounts due to or claimed by the Owner, including, but not limited to, payment to the Owner of all moneys due for deductive change orders, credits, uncorrected Defective Work, interest, damages, and the like. (§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia) The Owner may, at its sole discretion, agree on an item by item basis to release the retainage on items which are fully 100% complete and which have accepted by the Owner as being tested and complete and on which no further action or work will be required. Retainage which is released by the Owner shall be distributed by the Contractor in conformance with Section 37 of these General Conditions. (e) All material and Work for which partial payments are made shall thereupon become the sole property of the Owner, but this provision shall not relieve the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all materials and Work, including those for which payment has been made, or for the restoration of any damaged materials or Work. Nor shall this provision serve as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms and conditions of the Contract. (f) The Final Payment, which shall include the retainage, less any amounts due to or claimed by the Owner, shall not become due until the Architect/Engineer and the Owner agree that Final Completion has been achieved and until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner through the Architect/Engineer a Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and an Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), stating that all Subcontractors and Suppliers of either labor or materials have been paid all sums claimed by them for Work performed or 34 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 materials furnished in connection with this Project less retainage. Amounts due the Owner which may be withheld from the Final Payment may include, but are not limited to, amounts due pursuant to Section 3(i), Section 16(a)-(d), Section 31(d), costs incurred to repair or replace Defective Work, costs incurred as a result of the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions or omissions of those for whom the Contractor is responsible, delay damages under Section 43(h), and any liquidated or actual damages. If all Subcontractors and Suppliers of labor and materials have not been paid the full amount claimed by them, the Contractor shall list each to which an agreed amount of money is due or which has a claim in dispute. With respect to all such Subcontractors and Suppliers, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, along with the Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), an affidavit from each such Subcontractor and Supplier stating the amount of their subcontract or supply contract, the percentage of completion, the amounts paid to them by the Contractor and the dates of payment, the amount of money still due if any, any interest due the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to Section 37(b) below, and whether satisfactory arrangements have been made for the payment of said amounts. If no agreement can be reached between the Contractor and one or more Subcontractors or Suppliers as to the amounts owed to the Subcontractors or Suppliers, the Owner may, in its discretion, pay such portion of the moneys due to the Contractor which is claimed by the Subcontractor or Supplier into a Virginia Court or Federal Court sitting in Virginia, in the manner provided by law. Said payment into court shall be deemed a payment to the Contractor. Nothing in this Section shall be construed as creating any obligation or contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Supplier, and the Owner shall not be liable to any Subcontractor or Supplier on account of any failure or delay of the Owner in complying with the terms hereof. (g) Upon successful completion of the final inspection and all Work required by the Contract, including but not limited to the delivery of As-Built drawings, equipment manuals, written warranties, acceptance of the Work by the Owner and the delivery of the affidavits required in Section 36(f) of these General Conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall deliver the written Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor, stating the entire amount of Work performed and compensation earned by the Contractor, including extra work and compensation therefor. The Owner may accept the Work for occupancy or use while asserting claims against the Contractor; disputing the amount of compensation due to the Contractor; disputing the quality of the Work, its completion, or its compliance with the Contract Documents; or any other reason. (h) Unless there is a dispute about the compensation due to the Contractor, Defective Work, quality of the Work, compliance with the Contract Documents, completion itself, claims by the Owner, other matters in contention between the parties, or unless monies are withheld pursuant to the Comptroller's Debt Setoff Program, within thirty (30) days after receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) in proper form by the Architect/Engineer at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor the amount approved by the Architect/Engineer, less all prior payments and advances whatsoever to or for the account of the Contractor. In the case of Final Payment, the completed Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), the Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and the Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) shall accompany the final Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) which is forwarded to the Owner for payment. The date on which payment is due shall be referred to as the Payment Date. In the event of disputes, payment shall be mailed on or before the Payment Date for amounts and Work not in dispute, subject to any set offs claimed by the Owner; provided, however in instances where further appropriations are required by the General Assembly or where the issuance of further bonds is required, in which case, payment shall be made within thirty (30) days after the effective date of such appropriation or within thirty (30) days after the receipt of bond proceeds by the Owner. All prior estimates and payments including those relating to extra Work may be corrected and adjusted in any payment and shall be corrected and adjusted in the Final Payment. In the event that any request for payment (CO-12) by the Contractor contains a defect or impropriety, the Owner shall notify the Contractor 35 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 of any defect or impropriety which would prevent payment by the Payment Date, within five (5) days after receipt of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) by the Owner from the Architect/Engineer. 37. (i) Interest shall accrue on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor which remain unpaid seven (7) days following the Payment Date. Said interest shall accrue at the discounted ninety-day U.S. Treasury bill rate as established by the Weekly Auction and as reported in the publication entitled The Wall Street Journal on the weekday following each such Weekly Auction. During the period of time when the amounts due to the Contractor remain unpaid following the seventh (7) day after the Payment Date, the interest accruing shall fluctuate on a weekly basis and shall be that established by the immediately prior Weekly Auction. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to gather and substantiate the applicable weekly interest rates to the satisfaction of the Owner and to calculate to the satisfaction of the Owner the interest due. In no event shall the rate of interest charge exceed the rate of interest charged pursuant to §58.1-1812 of the Code of Virginia. No interest shall accrue on retainage or when payment is delayed because of disagreement between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or timeliness of the Work, including, but not limited to, compliance with Contract Documents or the accuracy of any Request for Payment received. This exception to the accrual of interest stated in the preceding sentence shall apply only to that portion of a delayed payment which is actually the subject of such a disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of such disagreement. Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted, however, to prevent the withholding of retainage to assure faithful performance of the Contract. These same provisions relating to payment of interest to the Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of interest on any amounts due from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on any claims by the Owner. The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is deemed to be the date of payment to the addressee. (j) The acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Payment shall be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Suppliers, and of all liability to the Contractor whatever, including liability for all things done or furnished in connection with this Work, except for things done or furnished which are the subject of unresolved claims for which the Contractor has filed a timely written notice of intent, provided a claim is submitted no later than sixty (60) days after Final Payment. Acceptance of any interest payment by the Contractor shall be a release of the Owner from claims by the Contractor for late payment. (k) No certificate for payment issued by the Architect/Engineer, and no payment, final or otherwise, no certificate of completion, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner, shall be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract, nor shall the same relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or Defective Work or operate to release the Contractor or his Surety from any obligation under the Contract, the Standard Performance Bond and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR (§ 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia) Under § 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia, the Contractor is obligated to: (a) Within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid to the Contractor by the Owner for Work performed by the Subcontractor or Supplier under this Contract, (1) Pay the Subcontractor or Supplier for the proportionate share of the total payment received from the Owner attributable to the Work performed by the Subcontractor or the materials furnished by the Supplier under this Contract; or (2) Notify the Subcontractor or Supplier, in writing, of his intention to withhold all or a part of the Subcontractor or Supplier's payment with the reason for nonpayment; 36 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (b) Pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier on all amounts owed by the Contractor that remain unpaid after seven (7) days following receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Owner for Work performed by the Subcontractor or materials furnished by the Supplier under this contract, except for amounts withheld as allowed under subsection (a) (2) of this Section. (c) Include in each of his subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower tier subcontractor. Each Subcontractor shall include with its invoice to, or request for payment from, the Contractor, a certification that that Subcontractor has paid each of its suppliers and lower tier subcontractors their proportionate share of previous payments received from the Contractor attributable to the Work performed or the materials furnished by it under this Contract. The Contractor's obligation to pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to subsection (b) of this Section is not an obligation of the Owner. A modification to this Contract shall not be made for the purpose of providing reimbursement for such interest charge. A Contractor's cost reimbursement claim shall not include any amount for reimbursement of such interest charge. 38. CHANGES IN THE WORK (a) The Owner may at any time, by written order utilizing the Commonwealth of Virginia Change Order Form CO-11 and without notice to the sureties, make changes in the Work which are within the general scope of the Contract, except that no change will be made which will increase the total Contract Price to an amount more than twenty percent (20%) in excess of the original Contract Price without notice to sureties. At the time of the Preconstruction Meeting described in Section 50(b), the Contractor and the Owner shall advise each other in writing of their designees authorized to accept and/or approve changes to the Contract Price and of any limits to each designee's authority. Should any designee or limits of authority change during the time this Contract is in effect, the Contractor or Owner with such a change shall give written notice to the other within seven (7) calendar days, utilizing the procedures set forth in these General Conditions. The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the Owner's designee is limited by Virginia Code §2.2-4309 and any other applicable statute. In making any change, the charge or credit for the change shall be determined by one of the following methods as selected by the Owner: (1) Fixed Price: By a mutually agreed fixed amount change to the Contract Price and/or time allowed for completion of the Work. The Change Order shall be substantiated by documentation itemizing the estimated quantities and costs of all labor, materials, and equipment required as well as any mark-up used. The price change shall include the Contractor's reasonable overhead and profit, including overhead for any unreasonable delay arising from or related to the Change Order and/or the change in the Work. See Subsections (d), (e) and (f), below. (2) Unit Price: By using unit prices and calculating the number of net units of Work in each part of the Work which is changed, either as the Work progresses or before Work on the change commences, and by then multiplying the calculated number of units by the applicable unit price set forth in the Contract or multiplying by a mutually agreed unit price if none was provided in the Contract. No additional percentage markup for overhead or profit shall be added to the unit prices. (3) Cost Reimbursement: By ordering the Contractor to perform the changed Work on a cost reimbursement basis by issuing two Change Orders citing this Subsection, an initiating Change Order, authorizing the changed Work, and a confirming Change Order 37 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 approving the additional cost and time for the changed Work. The initiating Change Order shall: (i) Describe the scope or parameters of the change in the Work; (ii) Describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment and the method of measuring the quantity of work performed; (iii) Address the impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion; (iv) Order the Contractor to proceed with the change to the Work; (v) Order the Contractor to keep in a form acceptable to the Owner, an accurate, itemized account of the actual cost of the change in the Work, including, but not limited to, the actual costs of labor, materials, equipment, and supplies; (vi) Order the Contractor to annotate a copy of the Project schedule to accurately show the status of the Work at the time this first Change Order is issued, to show the start and finish dates of the changed Work, and the status of the Work when the changed Work is completed; and (vii) State that a confirming Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of the ordered changed in the Work into the Contract Price and any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall sign the initiating Change Order acknowledging he has been ordered to proceed with the change in the Work. The Contractor's signature on each initiating Change Order citing this Subsection 38(a)(3) as the method for determining the cost of the Work shall not constitute the Contractor's agreement on the cost or time impact of the ordered Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall not exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts (based upon rates established by the US Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, or other generally recognized cost data publication), materials, and equipment in the locality of the Project, may include only those items listed as allowable in Subsection 38(e), and shall not include any of the costs listed as not allowable in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily basis, to verify such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to determine the cost of the change to the Work. Within fourteen (14) days after the conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and the Owner shall reach agreement on (i) a cost for the ordered Work, based on the records kept and the Contractor's allowance for overhead and profit determined in accordance with the provisions set forth in Subsections 38(d), (e), and (f) below; and (ii) the change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, if necessary, as a result of the ordered Work. Such costs and time shall be incorporated into a confirming Change Order which references the initiating Change Order. If agreement on the cost and time of the changed Work cannot be reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the Contractor may submit a claim for the disputed cost or time as provided for in Section 47. (4) By issuing a unilateral change order in the amount deemed appropriate by the Owner for the Work. If the Contractor objects to the amount or scope of the change order then the Contractor may within the 14 days of the date of the change order file a claim for the disputed amount as provided for in section 47. 38 DGS-30-054 (04/13) (b) CO-7 The Contractor shall review any Owner requested or directed change and shall respond in writing within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the proposed change (or such other reasonable time as the Owner may direct), stating the effect of the proposed change upon his Work, including any increase or decrease in the Contract time and price. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed change in Contract Price. The Owner shall review the Contractor's proposal and respond to the Contractor within thirty (30) days of receipt. If a change to the Contract Price and Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date are agreed upon, both parties shall sign the Change Order. If the Contract Price and Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date are not agreed upon, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed under Subsection 38(a)(3), above. Change Orders shall be effective when signed by both parties, unless approval by the Governor or his designee is required, in which event the Change Order shall be effective when signed by the Governor or his designee. (c) In figuring changes, any instructions for measurement of quantities set forth in the Contract shall be followed. (d) Overhead and profit for both additive and deductive changes in the Work (other than changes covered by unit prices) shall be paid by applying the specified percentage markups only on the net cost of the changed Work (i.e. difference in cost between original and changed Work excluding overhead and profit). Said percentages for overhead and profit shall reasonably approximate the Contractor’s overhead and profit, but shall not exceed the percentages for each category listed below: (e) (1) If a Subcontractor does all or part of the changed Work, the Subcontractor's mark-up for overhead and profit on the Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). The Contractor's mark-up for overhead and profit on the Subcontractor's price shall be a maximum of ten percent (10%). (2) If the Contractor does all or part of the changed Work, its markup for overhead and profit on the changed Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). (3) If a Sub-subcontractor at any tier does all or part of the changed Work, the Subsubcontractor's markup on that Work shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). The markup for overhead and profit on a sub-subcontractor's Work by the Contractor and all intervening tiers of Subcontractors shall not exceed a total of ten percent (10%). (4) Where Work is deleted from the Contract prior to commencement of that Work without substitution of other similar Work, one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price attributable to that Work shall be deducted from the Contract Price. However, in the event that material Submittals have been approved and orders placed for said materials, a lesser amount, but in no case less than eighty percent (80%) of the Contract Price attributable to that Work, shall be deducted from the Contract Price. The credit to the Owner for reduced premiums on labor and material bonds and performance bonds shall in all cases be one hundred percent (100%). Allowable costs for changes in the Work may include but are not limited to the following: (1) Labor costs for employees directly employed in the change in the Work, including salaries and wages plus the cost of payroll charges and fringe benefits and overtime premiums, if such premiums are explicitly authorized by the Owner. 39 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (2) Materials incorporated into the change to the Work, including costs of transportation and storage, if applicable. If applicable, all cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor, unless the Owner deposits funds with the Contractor to make such payments, and all trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from the sale of surplus materials shall accrue to the Owner. (3) Equipment incorporated in the changed Work or equipment used directly in accomplishing the Work. If rented expressly for accomplishing the change in the Work, the cost shall be the rental rate according to the terms of the rental agreement, which the Owner shall have the right to approve. If owned by the Contractor, the costs shall be a reasonable price based upon the life expectancy of the equipment and the purchase price of the equipment. If applicable, transportation costs may be included. (4) Costs of increases in premiums for the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond and the Standard Performance Bond, provided coverage for the cost of the change in the Work results in such increased costs. At the Owner's request, the Contractor shall provide proof of his notification to the Surety of the change in the Work and of the Surety's agreement to include such change in its coverage. The cost of the increase in premium shall be an allowable cost but shall not be marked up. (5) Contractor and Subcontractor overhead costs as set forth in Subsection (d) markups above. (6) Agreed Compensation for Overhead for Changes to Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date for Changes to the Work: If the change in the Work also changes the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date by adding days to complete the Work, an itemized accounting of the following direct Site overhead and home office overhead and other indirect overhead expenses set forth in subparagraphs (i) and (ii) below may be considered as allowable costs for compensation in addition to those shown above: (i) Direct Site Overhead Expenses: The Contractor’s per diem expenses, as shown by the itemized accounting, for the following allowable direct Site overhead expenses: The Site superintendent's pro-rata salary, temporary Site office trailer, and temporary Site utilities including basic telephone service, electricity, heat, water, and sanitary / toilet facilities for each day added. All other direct expenses are covered by and included in the Subsection 38(d) markups above. (ii) Home Office and Other Indirect Overhead Expenses: A five percent (5%) markup on the above direct Site overhead expenses will be allowed as compensation for the Contractor’s home office overhead and all other direct or indirect overhead expenses for days added to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date for a change in the Work. All other overhead and other direct or indirect overhead expenses are covered by and included in this markup and the Subsection (d) markups above. (7) (f) Any other costs directly attributable to the change in the Work with the exception of those set forth in Subsection 38(f) below. Allowable costs for changes in the Work shall not include the following: 40 DGS-30-054 (04/13) (g) CO-7 (1) Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, their employees, or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible, including, but not limited to, costs for the correction of Defective Work, for improper disposal of material, for equipment wrongly supplied, for delay in performing the Work, or for delay in obtaining materials or equipment. (2) Home office expenses including payroll costs for the Contractor's officers, executives, administrators, accountants, counsel, timekeepers, clerks, and other similar administrative personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work. These costs are deemed overhead included in the percentage markups allowable in Subsections 38(d) above. (3) Home and field office expenses not itemized in Subsection 38(e)(6) above. Such items include, but are not limited to, expenses of Contractor's home and branch offices, Contractor's capital expenses, interest on Contractor's capital used for the Work, charges for delinquent payments, small tools, incidental job costs, rent, utilities, telephone and office equipment, and other general overhead expenses. (4) Other items reasonably determined by the Owner to not be allowed. All Change Orders, except the "initial" Change Orders authorizing work citing Subsection 38(a)(3) procedures, must state that the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date is not changed or is either increased or decreased by a specific number of days. The old Time for Completion and, if changed, the new Time for Completion must be stated. If the Contractor requests an extension to the Time for Completion or a later Contract Completion Date, he must provide written justification for the extension to the Architect/Engineer and to the Owner. The written justification must demonstrate an anticipated actual increase in the time required to complete the Work beyond that allowed by the Contract as adjusted by prior change orders or amendments to the Contract, not just an increase or decrease in the time needed to complete some portion of the total Work. When a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no extension to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be allowed unless, and then only to the extent that, the additional or changed Work increases the length of the critical path beyond the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. If approved, the increase in time required to complete the Work shall be added to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. The Owner may decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date when an Owner-requested deletion from the Work results in a decrease in the actual time required to complete the Work as demonstrable on the Bar Graph Schedule or on the CPM Schedule, whichever is appropriate. The Contractor may submit a request to decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date under the procedures and subject to the considerations set forth in Section 19(f). No request for such decrease shall be considered for approval unless the proposed shorter schedule is otherwise acceptable under Sections 19(b) or (c), whichever is applicable. The Change Order decreasing the Time for Completion or changing the Contract Completion Date must be signed by both the Owner and the Contractor. With the exception of Change Orders under Subsection 38(a)(3), which shall arrive at a change to the Contract Price and any change to time using the procedures set forth therein, each Change Order shall include all time and monetary impacts of the change, whether the Change Order is considered alone or with all other changes during the course of the Project. Failure to include a change to time and changes in the Contract Price attributable to the change in time under Subsections 38(a)(1) or (2) shall waive any change to the time and Contract Price unless the parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a determination of the time related impacts of the change. Such a determination may be postponed not more than forty-five (45) days to give the 41 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Contractor an opportunity to demonstrate a change in the time and price needed to complete the Work. During any such postponement, the Work shall proceed, unless the Owner agrees otherwise. If at any time there is a delay in the critical path of the Work due to postponement, due to the Contractor's efforts to justify an extension of the time or an increase in the Contract Price, or due to the Contractor's refusal to proceed with any of the Work, pending agreement on a change in time or price, such delay and any Contractor costs resulting from it shall not serve as the basis for the extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or for an increase in the Contract Price. (h) The acceptance by the Contractor of any payment made by the Owner under a Change Order shall be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor and of all liability owing to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work described in the Change Order. The execution of any Change Order by the Owner shall not be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the Contractor or his surety from any obligation arising under the Contract, the Standard Performance Bond, or the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond. (i) Payments will not be made for any Work, labor, or materials performed on a unit price or a Subsection 38(a)(3) basis until the Contractor has furnished the Owner documents, certified as true and correct by an authorized officer or agent of the Contractor, evidencing the cost of such Work, labor, and materials. The Owner may require any or all of the following documentation to be provided by the Contractor. For Work performed on a Unit Price basis: (1) Certified measurements of authorized and approved excavations, over-excavations, fills and/or backfills, and similar work; and/or (2) Certified measurements of piling installed, caissons installed, and similar work; and/or (3) Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to the Site. For Work performed on a Subsection 38(a)(3) basis: (1) Certified payroll records showing the name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours, rate, and extension for each laborer, foreman, supervisor, or other worker; and/or (2) Equipment type & model, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, or other specified rate, and extension for each unit of equipment; (3) Invoices for materials showing quantities, prices, and extensions; (4) Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to the Site; (5) Certified measurements of over-excavations, piling installed and similar work; and/or (6) Transportation records for materials, including prices, loads, and extensions. Requests for payment shall be accompanied and supported by invoices for all l materials used and for all transportation charges claimed. If materials come from the Contractor's own stock, then an 42 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 affidavit may be furnished, in lieu of invoices, certifying quantities, prices, etc. to support the actual cost. 39. EXTRAS If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Architect/Engineer or by the Owner, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra Work which increases the scope of the Contract, then, except in emergencies endangering life or property, he shall give the Architect/Engineer and the Owner written notice thereof before proceeding to execute the Work. Said notice shall be given promptly enough to avoid delaying the Work and in no instance later than fourteen (14) days after the receipt of such instructions. Should it not be immediately clear to the Contractor that the change involves extra Work outside the scope of the Contract, written notice shall be sufficient if given as soon as possible after such realization, but in no event later than fourteen (14) days after the start of such Work. If the Owner agrees, a Change Order shall be issued as provided in Section 38 of these General Conditions, and any additional compensation shall be determined by one of the three (3) methods provided in Subsection 38(a), as selected by the Owner. If the Owner does not agree, then any claims for compensation for the extra Work shall be filed in accordance with Section 47. 40. CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period of ninety (90) days through no fault of the Contractor or anyone employed by him, or if the Owner should fail to pay to the Contractor within thirty (30) days any sum certified by the Architect/Engineer when no dispute exists as to the sum due or any provision of the Contract, then the Contractor may, upon ten (10) calendar days written notice to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, stop Work or terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for the cost of the Work actually performed, together with overhead and profit thereon, but profit on the Work performed shall be recovered only to the extent that the Contractor can demonstrate that he would have had profit on the entire Contract if he had completed the Work. The Contractor may not receive profit or any other type of compensation for parts of the Work not performed. The Contractor may recover the reasonable cost of physically closing down the Site, but no other costs of termination. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the Contractor. In no event shall termination of the Contract by the Contractor terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds. 41. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE (a) If the Contractor should be adjudged as bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, the Owner may terminate the Contract. If the Contractor should refuse or should repeatedly fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials and equipment, or if he should fail to perform the Work in a diligent, efficient, workmanlike, skillful, and careful manner, or if he should fail or refuse to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or Suppliers of material or labor, or if he should disregard laws, ordinances or the written instructions of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, or otherwise be in substantial violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may terminate the Contract. (b) Prior to termination of the Contract, the Owner shall give the Contractor and his surety ten (10) days written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition of "Notice") of these General Conditions and allow ten (10) days during which the Contractor and/or his surety may rectify the basis for the notice. If rectified to the satisfaction of the Owner within 43 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 said ten (10) days, the Owner may rescind its notice of termination. If not, the termination for cause shall become effective at the end of the ten (10) day notice period without further notice to the Contractor. In the alternative, the Owner may, in writing, postpone the effective date of the termination for cause, at its sole discretion, if it should receive reassurances from the Contractor and/or its surety that the basis for the termination will be remedied in a time and manner which the Owner finds acceptable. If at any time after such postponement, the Owner determines that Contractor and/or its surety has not or is not likely to rectify the causes of termination in an acceptable manner or within the time allowed, then the Owner may immediately terminate the Contract for cause, without the necessity of further ten (10) day notice, by notifying the Contractor and his surety in writing of the termination. In no event shall termination for cause terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds. (c) Upon termination of the Contract becoming effective, the Owner shall take possession of the Site and of all materials, tools and equipment thereon and shall proceed as follows: (1) No Security Provided: If no security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the Owner shall finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. If the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and having it completed by others. (2) Security Provided: If security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the Owner shall provide Notice to the Surety that termination of the Contract became effective and proceed as set forth in the Standard Performance Bond, CO-10, Form # DGS-30-084, and the Terms and Conditions therein. If the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price and the penal amount of the Standard Performance Bond, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and having it completed by others. 42. (d) If it should be judicially determined that the Owner improperly terminated this Contract for cause, then the termination shall be deemed to be a termination for the convenience of the Owner and the Contractor’s rights and remedies shall be solely limited to those provided by Section 42 of these General Conditions. (e) Termination of the Contract under this Section is in addition to and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner. Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any other right or remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the Contractor. The provisions of this Section shall survive termination of the Contract. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE (a) The Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any time without cause upon giving the Contractor written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition of "Notice") of these General Conditions. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall immediately cease Work and remove from the Site all of its labor forces, equipment and such of its materials as Owner elects not to purchase or to assume in the manner hereinafter provided. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall take such steps as Owner may require to assign to the Owner the Contractor's interest in all Subcontracts and purchase orders designated by Owner. After all such steps have been taken to Owner's satisfaction, the Contractor shall receive as full compensation for termination and assignment the following: 44 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 (1) Amounts due for Work performed in accordance with the Contract subsequent to the latest approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) through the date of termination; and (2) All amounts then otherwise due under the terms of this Contract associated with the Work performed prior to the date of termination; and (3) Reasonable compensation for the actual cost of demobilization incurred by the Contractor as a direct result of such termination. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for lost profits or for any other type of contractual compensation or damages other than those provided in Subsection 42(a). The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the Contractor. Upon payment of the foregoing, Owner shall have no further obligations to Contractor of any nature. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Owner for any consequential damages that may arise from or relate to the Owner’s termination of the Contract including, but not limited to, damages for loss of revenue, income, profit, business, reputation, or bonding capacity. 43. (b) In no event shall termination for the convenience of the Owner terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds. (c) Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any other right or remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The provisions of this Section shall survive termination of the Contract. DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME (a) Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by strikes, fires, unusual delays in transportation or unavoidable casualties, or other causes outside the control of the Owner or the Contractor, with the exception of delays caused by weather provided for in Section 6, for which the Contractor intends to request an extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may be, then the Contractor shall give the Owner and Architect/Engineer written notice of the delay within fourteen (14) days of the inception of the delay. The Contractor shall also give written notice to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen (14) days after such termination. If the Owner agrees with the existence and the impact of the delay, the Owner shall extend the Time for Completion, the Contract Completion Date or Final Completion Date, as the case may be, for the length of time that the date for Substantial Completion or Final Completion was actually delayed thereby, and the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated or actual damages for delay during the period of such extension nor shall the Contractor be due compensation or damages of any kind, under any theory of law, as a result of such delay, the impact of such delay, or acceleration of Work as a result of such delay. In the event a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be granted unless the Contractor demonstrates a delay in the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or approved bar graph schedule. (b) Excusable Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is unreasonably delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any acts or omissions of the Owner, its agents, or employees due to causes within the Owner's control, and the Contractor intends to request an extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may be, and/or additional compensation for damages, if any, caused by the delay, then the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately at the time of the occurrence giving rise to the delay by the fastest means available and shall give written notice no later than two (2) working days after inception of the delay. The Contractor's written notice shall specify the nature 45 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 of the delay claimed by the Contractor, the cause of the delay, and the impact of the delay on the Contractor's Work schedule. The Owner shall then have three (3) working days to respond to the Contractor's notice with a resolution, remedy, direction to alleviate the delay, or rejection of the Contractor’s notice of delay. The Owner’s failure to respond within the time required shall be deemed to be a rejection of the Contractor’s notice. The Contractor shall also give written notice to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen (14) days after such termination. If and to the extent that a delay is caused by or due to the Owner or A/E taking any actions permitted or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time or additional compensation only for the portion of the delay that is unreasonable, if any. (c) (d) (e) Non-Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or to any additional compensation for delays if and to the extent they are (1) caused by acts, omissions, fault, or negligence of the Contractor or his Subcontractors, agents or employees or due to foreseeable causes within their control, including, but not limited to, delays resulting from Defective Work including workmanship and/or materials, from rejected work which must be corrected before dependent work can proceed, from Defective Work or rejected work for which corrective action must be determined before like work can proceed, from incomplete, incorrect, or unacceptable Submittals or samples, or from the failure to furnish enough properly skilled workers, proper materials or necessary equipment to diligently perform the work in a timely manner in accordance with the Project schedule; or (2) due to causes that would entitle the Owner to recover delay costs or damages. No extension of time or additional compensation, if applicable, will be granted for any delay unless the claimed delay directly affects the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or the schedule shown on the approved bar graph schedule, whichever is applicable, and any float has been consumed. No extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for a delay if the Contractor failed to give notice in the manner and within the time prescribed in Subsections 43(a) or (b) above, whichever applies. Furthermore, no extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for any delay unless a written request therefor is made in writing to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, within twenty (20) days of the end of the delay. The request shall state the cause of the delay, the number of days of extension requested, and any additional compensation requested by the Contractor. Failure to give written notice of either the inception or the termination of the cause of delay or failure to present a claim for extension of time and/or monetary compensation within the times prescribed shall constitute a waiver of any claim for extension or additional compensation based upon that cause. Requests for extensions of time and/or compensation for delays pursuant to Subsection 43(b) above must be substantiated by itemized data and records clearly showing that the Work delayed was on the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or on the sequence of Work on the approved bar graph schedule, as modified, whichever applies, and that the additional time and/or costs incurred by the Contractor are directly attributable to the delay in the Work claimed. Furthermore, compensation for delay shall be calculated from the contractual Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as adjusted by Change Order, and shall not be calculated based on any early completion planned or scheduled by the Contractor, unless a Change Order has been executed pursuant to Section 19(f) changing the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to reflect such early completion. See Section 19 for procedures for the Contractor to follow if he plans early completion of the Work and wishes to request a Change Order reflecting the early completion date. Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Owner Delay: If and to the extent that the Contractor is entitled to an extension in the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and additional compensation purely as a result of delay under Subsection 43(b) and not as a result of a change in the Work under Section 38, the agreed 46 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 compensation and liquidated damages due the Contractor for days added to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date for each day of such delay shall be the per diem expenses as determined from an itemized accounting of the direct Site overhead expenses and home office and other indirect overhead expenses only as specified in Subsections 38(e)(6)(i) and (ii). These expenses shall exclude any and all expenses specified in Subsection 38(f). (f) If the Contractor submits a claim for delay damages pursuant to Subsection 43(b) above, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for a percentage of all costs incurred by the Owner in investigating, analyzing, negotiating, and litigating or arbitrating the claim, which percentage shall be equal to the percentage of the Contractor's total delay claim which is determined through litigation or arbitration to be false or to have no basis in law or in fact. (§ 2.2-4335, Code of Virginia) (g) Any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be accomplished only by issuance of a Change Order. (h) Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Contractor Delay: If the Contractor fails to complete the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner in the amounts set forth in the Supplemental General Conditions, if any, not as a penalty, but as fixed, agreed, and liquidated damages for delay until the Work is substantially or finally completed as the case may be. If liquidated damages are not so fixed in the Supplemental General Conditions, the Contractor shall be liable for any and all actual damages sustained as a result of delay. In addition to damages for delay, whether liquidated or actual, the Contractor shall also be liable for any and all actual damages sustained by the Owner as a result of any other breach of the Contract, including, but not limited to, Defective Work and abandonment of the Contract. (i) If liquidated damages are provided by the Supplemental General Conditions, the following provisions apply: (j) 44. (1) If the Work is not substantially complete by the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step One liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions for Step One liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Substantial Completion. (2) Once the Work is substantially complete, the accrual of Step One liquidated damages shall cease and the Contractor shall have thirty (30) calendar days in which to achieve Final Completion of the Work. (3) If Final Completion of the Work is not achieved on or before the thirtieth (30th) calendar day after Substantial Completion, and if the Owner has not granted any extension of time, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step Two liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions as Step Two liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Final Completion. The Contractor waives any and all defenses as to the validity of any liquidated damage provisions in the General Conditions or other Contract Documents, or of any liquidated damages assessed against the Contractor, on the grounds that such damages are void as penalties or are not reasonably related to actual damages. INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL COMPLETION (a) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2a), of the date when the Work or designated portion 47 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 thereof, will be, in his opinion, substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing to determine if it has reached Substantial Completion. The notice shall be given at least ten (10) days in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his written endorsement as to whether or not he concurs with the Contractor's statement that the Work will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. The Architect/Engineer's endorsement is a convenience to the Owner only and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in the matter nor shall the Architect/Engineer's endorsement be deemed to be evidence that the Work was substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing. Inspection and testing shall take place at a time(s) mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer. The inspection shall include a demonstration by the Contractor that all equipment, systems and operable components of the project function properly and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish access for the inspection and testing as provided in Section 21 of these General Conditions. The inspection and testing shall determine whether Substantial Completion has been accomplished and shall result in a written list of unfinished Work and Defective Work, commonly referred to as a "punch list", which must be finished and corrected to obtain Final Completion. After successful completion of the testing and the Architect / Engineer determines that, in its opinion, the Work, either in whole or in part, is substantially complete, the Architect / Engineer shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1a), that the Work, or a specified portion thereof, is recommended to be declared substantially complete. The Owner shall notify the Contractor, in writing, of the date the Owner accepts the Work, or the specified portion thereof, as substantially complete or the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the deficiencies to be corrected or completed before such Work will be accepted as substantially complete. 45. (b) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (form CO-13.2), of the date when the Work has reached or will reach Final Completion and will be ready for final inspection and testing. The notice shall be given at least five (5) days in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his endorsement as to whether or not he concurs in the Contractor's statement that the Work will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. That inspection and any necessary testing shall be conducted in the same manner as the inspection for Substantial Completion. When the Work is finally and totally complete, including the elimination of all defects, the Work shall be finally accepted by the Owner and Final Payment shall be made in accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions. (c) The Architect/Engineer shall conduct the inspections. The Owner may elect to have other persons of its choosing also participate in the inspections. If one or more Substantial or Final Completion re-inspections are required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs of re-inspection or, at the Owner's option, the costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor. (d) A representative of the State Fire Marshal's Office will either be present at the Substantial and Final Completion inspections or otherwise inspect the completed Work and advise the Owner whether the Work meets the fire safety requirements of the applicable building code. (e) Approval of Work at or as a result of any inspection required herein shall not release the Contractor or his surety from responsibility for complying with the Contract. GUARANTEE OF WORK (a) Except as otherwise specified, all Work shall be, and is hereby, guaranteed by the Contractor against defects resulting from the use of materials, equipment or workmanship, which are defective, inferior, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, for one (1) year from the 48 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 date of Final Completion of the entire Project by the Owner. Equipment and facilities which have seasonal limitations on their operation (e.g. heating or air conditioning units) shall be guaranteed for one (1) full year from the date of seasonally appropriate tests and acceptance, in writing, by the Owner. Where the Owner agrees to take Beneficial Occupancy of a portion or phase of the Work which has been determined to be substantially complete before the entire Work is finally completed, the guarantees for the materials, equipment and workmanship in that portion or phase shall begin on the date that the Owner takes Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in the Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, or by separate agreement. At six (6) months and eleven (11) months after substantial completion, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to review the status of and assign value to any unresolved warranty, guarantee, and punch list items. (b) If, within any guarantee period, Work which is not in accordance with the Contract, Defective Work, or inferior material, equipment or workmanship is noted by the Owner or Architect/Engineer which requires or renders necessary repairs or changes in connection with the guaranteed Work, the Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, such notice being given not later than two weeks after the guarantee period expires, and without expense to the Owner: (1) Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed Work and correct all defects, inferior materials, equipment or workmanship therein; (2) Make good all damage to the structure or Site or equipment or contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Owner or the Architect/Engineer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract; and (3) Make good any Work or materials or the equipment and contents of structures and/or Site disturbance that results from fulfilling the provisions of this Section. (c) In any case, when in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract and this guarantee or any other guaranty or warranty, the Contractor disturbs any work performed by a separate contractor, he shall restore such work to a condition satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and Owner and guarantee such restored work to the same extent as if it was guaranteed under this Contract. (d) If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee as set forth in this Section, the Owner may have the defects or inferior materials, equipment or workmanship corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expense incurred. (e) All special warranties and guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work that may be stipulated in or required by the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this Section during the first year of the life of such special warranty or guarantee. (f) The guarantee of this Section shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law. (g) Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including liability for Defective Work under Section 30. This Section relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor as set forth in this Section to correct the Work and does not limit the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his other obligations under the Contract Documents. 49 DGS-30-054 (04/13) 46. CO-7 (h) In the event the Work of the Contractor is to be modified by another contractor, either before or after the Final Inspection provided by Section 44 of the General Conditions, the first Contractor shall remain responsible in all respects under this Section's Guarantee of Work and under any other warranties or guarantees, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for any defects in material or workmanship introduced by the contractor modifying his Work. The first Contractor and the contractor making the modifications shall each be solely responsible for his respective work. The contractor modifying the earlier Work shall be responsible for any damage to or defect introduced into the Work by his modification. If the first contractor claims that a subsequent contractor has introduced defects of materials and/or workmanship into his Work, it shall be the burden of the contractor making the claim to demonstrate clearly the nature and extent of such introduced defects and the other contractor's responsibility for those defects. Any contractor modifying the work of another shall have the same burden if he asserts that defects in his work were caused by the contractor whose work he is modifying. (i) The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Commonwealth of Virginia, the Owner and the Owner’s consultants, representatives, agents and employees from and against any and all claims, causes of action, losses, costs, expenses or damages, including but not limited to attorney's fees, of any kind or nature whatsoever, arising from or relating to any bodily injury, including sickness, disease or death, or any property damage, that result from or arise out of the work performed by the Contractor, or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the Work, through the use of unacceptable materials in the Work, or resulting from any act, omission, negligence, or misconduct of the Contractor, any of his subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. The Owner may retain as much of the moneys due the Contractor under the Contract as the Owner considers necessary to ensure that a fund will be available to pay a settlement or judgment of such suits, actions, or claims. If insufficient monies are or will become due, the Contractor’s surety and/or insurers will not be released from liability until all such claims and actions have been settled and suitable evidence to that effect has been furnished the Owner. ASSIGNMENTS Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract in whole or any part without the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder, without the prior written consent of the Owner. Consent to assignment shall not be unreasonably withheld. No assignment shall relieve any party from its obligations under the Contract. 47. CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES (§2.2-4363, Code of Virginia) (a) Contractual claims, whether for money or for other relief, shall be submitted, in writing, no later than sixty (60) days after Final Payment; however, written notice of the Contractor's intention to file such claim must be given within fourteen (14) days of the time of the occurrence or beginning of the Work upon which the claim is based. Such notice shall state that it is a “notice of intent to file a claim” and include a written statement describing the act or omission of the Owner or its agents that allegedly caused or may cause damage to the Contractor and the nature of the claimed damage. The submission of a timely notice is a prerequisite to recovery under this Section. Failure to submit such notice of intent within the time and in the manner required shall be a conclusive waiver of the claim by the Contractor. Oral notice, the Owner’s actual knowledge, or a written notice given after the expiration of fourteen (14) days of time of the occurrence or beginning of the Work upon which the claim is based, shall not be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of this Section. Although the Contractor may be required to submit certain classes of claims prior to Final Payment, and the Contractor is not prevented from submitting claims during the pendency of the Work, the Owner shall not be obligated to render a final written decision on any claim until after 50 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Final Payment. All claims shall state that they are “claims” pursuant to this Section, be submitted along with all practically available supporting evidence and documentation and the certification required by Subsection 47(f), and request a final decision. Certificates for payment, applications for payment, vouchers, invoices and similar requests for payment submitted for work done by the Contractor in accordance with the expected contract performance are routine submissions and shall not be considered claims under this Section. Proposed or requested change orders, demands for money compensation or other relief, and correspondence and e-mails to the Owner or its representatives, which do not strictly comply with the requirements of this Section, shall not be considered claims under this Section. 48. (b) No written decision denying a claim or addressing issues related to the claim shall be considered a denial pursuant to this Section unless the written decision makes express reference to this Section and is signed by the Agency head or his designee. The Contractor may not institute legal action prior to receipt of the Owner's final written decision on the claim unless the Owner fails to render such a decision within ninety (90) days of submission of the claim, at which time the claim shall be deemed denied. (c) The decision of the agency head or other signatory on the Contract shall be final and conclusive unless the Contractor within six (6) months of the date of the final decision on a claim, initiates legal action as provided in § 2.2-4364 of the Code of Virginia. Failure of the Owner to render a decision within 90 days shall not result in the Contractor being awarded the relief claimed nor shall it result in any other relief or penalty. The sole result of the Owner's failure to render a decision within 90 days shall be the Contractor's right to immediately institute legal action. No administrative appeals procedure pursuant to § 2.2-4365 of the Code of Virginia has been established for contractual claims under this Contract. (d) Pursuant to § 2.2-4366, Alternative Dispute Resolution, of the Code of Virginia, the Owner may enter into an agreement with the Contractor to submit disputes arising from the performance of this Contract to arbitration and utilize mediation and other alternative dispute resolution procedures. However, such procedures entered into by the Owner, the Commonwealth, or any department, institution, division, commission, board or bureau thereof, shall be non-binding and subject to § 2.2-514, as applicable. (e) In the event that a dispute, claim or controversy between the Owner and the Contractor arises regarding the requirements of the Contract, the performance of the Work, payment due the Contractor, the terms of any Change Order, or otherwise, the Contractor shall not stop, suspend or delay the Work or any part of the Work to be performed under the Contract, or under any Change Order, or as ordered by the Owner. The Contractor shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work to completion, including work required in any Change Order or as directed by the Owner. (f) Along with a claim submitted under this Section, the Contractor shall submit a claim certification form. Claims submitted without the certification form shall not constitute a proper claim and, if not submitted with the certification within the time required, shall be deemed to be waived. (g) The remedies provided in these General Conditions, including costs, expenses, damages or extensions of time, shall be the Contractor’s sole remedies for the acts, omissions or breaches of the Owner, which shall survive termination or breach of the Contract. ASBESTOS (a) This subsection applies to projects involving existing buildings where asbestos abatement is not a part of the Work, when the scope of the project has been reviewed and a comprehensive survey 51 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 conducted by an individual licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation to conduct building inspections for asbestos containing materials in buildings, and where the Owner has attempted to remove or encapsulate all asbestos containing material that may become friable or damaged during this Project. Prior to commencement of Work, the results of the comprehensive survey or any other asbestos survey shall be made available to the Contractor, who shall be responsible for performing his Work so as not to disturb any remaining asbestos, encapsulated or otherwise, identified in such survey or surveys. If the Contractor discovers or inadvertently disturbs any material that he knows, should have known or has reason to believe, may contain asbestos that has not been previously identified, was overlooked during the removal, was deemed not to be friable or was encapsulated, the Contractor shall stop Work in the area containing or suspected to contain the asbestos, secure the area, and notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately by telephone or in person with written notice as soon as possible. The Owner will have the suspect material sampled. If the sample is positive and must be disturbed in the course of the Work, the Owner shall have the material repaired or removed and shall pay for the bulk sample analysis. Except as provided in §11-4.1 of the Code of Virginia, if the material disturbed is not within the Contractor's authorized Work and/or Work area or under this Contract, the Contractor shall pay for all associated sampling and abatement costs. 49. 50. (b) If asbestos abatement is included as a part of the Work, the Contractor shall assure that the asbestos abatement work is accomplished by those duly licensed as described in Section 3 of these General Conditions and in accordance with the specific requirements of the Contract and all applicable laws and regulations. (c) If asbestos abatement is included as part of the Work, the licensed asbestos Subcontractor shall obtain the insurance required under Section 11 (e) of these General Conditions. TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT (a) As a part of the Work, the Contractor in conjunction with his Subcontractors and Suppliers shall provide the Owner's operations and maintenance personnel with adequate instruction and training in the proper operation and maintenance of any equipment, systems, and related controls provided or altered in the Work. The training requirements may be further defined in the specifications. (b) The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of two (2) copies of operating, maintenance and parts manuals for all equipment and systems provided in the Work. Further specific requirements may be indicated in the specifications. PROJECT MEETINGS (a) The intention of this Section is that the Contractor, the Owner and the A/E have timely exchange of information and cooperate to accomplish the Work as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for managing the Work, obtaining approvals and requesting clarifications on a timely, reasonable basis. The Owner and its A/E are responsible for making a reasonable effort to provide timely responses to the Contractor. (b) Preconstruction Meeting: 52 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 Prior to the start of construction and no later than 15 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, a "Preconstruction" meeting shall be held with attendees to include the Owner's Project Manager and Project Inspector, the Architect/Engineer's project manager and representatives of each design discipline involved in the Project, the Regional Fire Marshal, the Contractor's project manager and superintendent (and scheduler, if Contractor desires), and representatives of the Contractor's major Subcontractors. The purpose of the meeting is to clarify and discuss the specifics related to, but not limited to, the following: (c) (1) Persons involved from each entity and their chain of authority including the names of persons authorized to sign Change Orders and any limits to their authority. Name of Contractor’s on-site certified Responsible Land Disturber. (2) Names, addresses, telephone numbers and FAX numbers to be used for Requests for Information (RFI), Requests for Clarification (RFC), Requests for Proposals (RFP), shop drawings, Submittals, and notices. (3) Contractor's proposed construction schedule and Owner's sequencing requirements, if any. (4) Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) requirements and procedures. (5) Procedures for shop drawings, product data and Submittals. (6) Procedures for handling Field Orders and Change Order Form CO-11. (7) Procedures for Contractor's request for time extension, if any. (8) Construction Site requirements, procedures and clarifications to include: - Manner of conducting the Work - Site specialties such as dust and erosion control, stormwater management, project signs, clean up and housekeeping, temporary facilities, utilities, security, and traffic - Safety - Layout of the Work - Quality control, testing, inspections, and notices required Site visits by the A/E and others - Owner's Project Inspector duties - Running Punch List - As-Built Drawings (9) Procedures and documentation of differing or unforeseen Site conditions (10) Monthly Pay Meeting (11) Assignment of responsibility for generation of meeting minutes of all project meetings. (12) Project Close-Out requirements and procedures (13) Project records Monthly Pay Meeting: Section 36 establishes the requirement for a monthly pay meeting which will usually be held at or near the Site. In addition to Owner, A/E and Contractor representatives, the following 53 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 representatives, at a minimum, should be available to attend portions of the meeting, as applicable or necessary: - Owner's Project Inspector Contractor's project superintendent A/E representative of each discipline where Work was performed for the current pay request or where Work is projected to be performed in the coming month. A representative of each subcontractor who performed work included in the current pay request. A representative of each subcontractor who is projected to perform work in the coming month. The following topics should be included, as a minimum, in the monthly pay meeting: (d) (1) Observations of status, quality and workmanship of Work in progress (2) Validation of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for payment (3) Conformance with proposed construction schedule (4) Outstanding Requests for Information, Requests for Clarification and Requests for Proposal (5) Submittals with action pending (6) Status of pending Change Orders (7) Status of Running Punch List items (8) Work proposed for coming pay period (9) Discussions of any problems or potential problems which need attention Other Meetings: Requirements for other meetings, such as progress meetings, coordination meetings, preinstallation meetings and/or partnering meetings, may be included in the Contract Documents. 51. SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM) BUSINESS PROCUREMENT PLAN The Owner has developed a “SWAM” plan for increasing procurement from small, womenowned, and minority-owned (SWAM) businesses in its construction program. The Owner’s SWAM aspirational goals and plan are included in the contract documents for use by the Contractor in developing its plan for involving small, women-owned, and minority-owned (SWAM) businesses through subcontracting, and through the purchasing of goods, materials, supplies and services in the Contractor’s construction program. The Owner’s plan provides criteria and goals for the Contractor in developing a plan, for submitting its plan and for reporting its achievements in meeting the goals established for the Contract. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the posting of the Notice of Intent to Award but not later than 30 days after the effective date of the contract, provide a list of Subcontractors that are proposed to perform the work, including SWAM subcontractors, vendors and suppliers showing their DMBE certification numbers where applicable. Upon receipt of the list, the Owner 54 DGS-30-054 (04/13) CO-7 may, based on the Agency SWAM Procurement Plan require the Contractor to provide additional information on work that has been bid by SWAM contractors, and areas in which the scope of work may be reduced in size to increase the pool of potential SWAM contractors. Selection of particular Subcontractors for a certain part of the work shall be made in accord with Section 9, Subcontracts of the General Conditions. ***ENDOFGENERALCONDITIONS*** 55 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 00850 ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS A. The following documents are not printed in this Project Manual but are included by reference: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Instructions to Bidders (HECO-7a), dated 2/7/12. Contract between University and Contractor (HECO-9), dated 05/08/13. Standard Performance Bond (HECO-10), dated 10/27/09. Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (HECO-10.1), dated 11/18/13. Contract Change Order (HECO-11) and Change Order Justification (HECO 11a), both dated 8/31/12. General Contractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-GC-1), dated 10/03/13. Subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-SC-1), dated 10/03/13. Sub-subcontractor Estimate for Change Order (HECO-SS-1), dated 10/03/13. Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (HECO-12), dated 12/6/10. The following documents immediately follow this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. Affidavit of Payment of Claims (CO-13), dated 2/01. Final Report of Structural and Special Inspections (HECO 13.1b), dated 3/18/09. Certificate of Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2), dated 7/21/09. Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by Contractor (HECO-13.2a), dated 2/23/09. PART 2 - (NOT USED) PART 3 - (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00850 - 1 ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00850 - 2 DGS-30-108 CO-13 (Rev. 02/01) Page 1 of 1 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF CLAIMS By: This day personally appeared before me, , a Notary Public in and for the City (County) of , and, being by me first duly sworn, states that all subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials have been paid all sums due them for work performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Contract between the Commonwealth of Virginia, _____________________________________________________________ ______________, Owner, and______________________________________________ , Contractor, dated ,20 , for the construction of or arrangements have been made by the Contractor satisfactory to such subcontractors and suppliers with respect to payments of such sums as may be due them by the Contractor. Typed Contractor Name By: Signature Typed Name &Title of Person Signing Subscribed and sworn to before me this expires on the day of day of , 20 , 20 . Notary Public . My commission THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK HECO-13.1b (3/18/09) Page 1 of 1 HECO 13.1b FINAL REPORT OF STRUCTURAL & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS Finance & Budget (for closeout & scanning) University of Virginia 575 Alderman Road / P.O. Box 400726 Charlottesville, VA 22904-4726 Ref: PROJECT TITLE: Project Code: ; PIMS # A/E of Record: ; Work Order # To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Structural & Special Inspections required for this Project, and itemized in the HECO-6b, Special Inspections listing attached to the HECO-6a, Statement of Structural and Special Inspections, submitted for permit, have been completed. The discrepancies noted and the resolution/disposition of each are noted on the attached pages 1 thru . Respectfully submitted, Structural Engineer of Record Project Inspector by:____________________ (Signature) (date) by: ____________________ (Signature) (date) Name: Name: Title: Title: University Project Manager by: ____________________ (Signature) (date) Name: Title: THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK HECO-13.2 (7/21/09) Page 1 of 1 HECO-13.2 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR Date Facilities Planning & Construction P.O. Box 400726 Charlottesville, Virginia 22904-4726 PROJECT TITLE: Project Code: ; Work Order # ; PIMS # In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Between the University and the Contractor, the undersigned hereby states that the above named Project has reached Final Completion in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, as modified by any approved Change Order(s), on date: All applicable tests, certificates, and regulatory inspections required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC) and the Contract Documents have been performed and the University has been provided with a copy of each report. As-built marked up prints required by the Contract Documents have been provided to the A/E. The University has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including their starting date(s), written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents. All training, operating instructions, and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have been provided to the University. Contractor: _________________________ By: _______________________________ (Signature) (date) Name: _____________________________ Title: ________________________________ Address: _____________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK HECO-13.2a (2/23/09) Page 1 of 2 HECO-13.2a CERTIFICATE OF PARTIAL OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR Date Facilities Planning & Construction P.O. Box 400726 Charlottesville, Virginia 22904-4726 PROJECT TITLE: Project Code: ; Work Order # ; PIMS # In accordance with the requirements of the Agreement Between the University and the Contractor, the undersigned Contractor hereby states that portions of the above are Substantially Complete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, as modified by any approved Change Order(s.) Those portions of the Project now Substantially Complete are: . All applicable tests, certificates, and regulatory inspections required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC) and the Contract Documents have been performed with respect to the Substantially Complete portions of the Project and the University has been provided with a copy of each report. As-built marked up prints of the Substantially Complete portions of the Project have been provided to the A/E as required by the Contract Documents. The University has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting date(s) of all warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents with respect to the Substantially Complete portions of the Project, except as follows: . All training, operating instructions, and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have been provided to the University, except as follows: . This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of Contractor’s obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor _________________________ by: _______________________________ (Signature) (date) HECO-13.2a (2/23/09) Page 2 of 2 Name: _____________________________ Title: ________________________________ Address: _____________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ The following documents are attached to and made a part of this certificate: List of unfinished and defective Work, pages 1 thru . UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 00851 DRAWING INDEX SHEET NUMBER / SHEET NAME COVER T COVER SHEET AND INDEX ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A0.02 A2.01 A3.00 A3.10 A3.20 PROJECT INFORMATION DEMOLITION PLAN, FLOOR PLAN & REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PARTITION TYPES & DETAILS INTERIOR DESIGN SELECTIONS & FINISH INFORMATION DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS MECHANICAL DRAWINGS M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 MECHANICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS, AND ABBREVIATIONS PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL WORK - MECHANICAL PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - MECHANICAL MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS FIRE PROTECTION DRAWINGS FP1 FP2 PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL WORK - FIRE PROTECTION PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - NEW WORK - FIRE PROTECTION ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E1 E2 E3 E4 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, CONVENTIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS PART FOURTH FLOOR PLAN - REMOVAL AND NEW WORK - ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00851 - 1 DRAWING INDEX HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 00851 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01000 GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.2 This Division 01 shall be used with the General Conditions (HECO-7/CO-7; HECO-7CM; and HECO-7DB/CO-7DB), Supplemental General Conditions, and the other Contract Documents. The term "University" is synonymous with "Owner." UNIVERSITY'S REPRESENTATIVES A. The University may assign a Construction Administration Manager (CAM). The duties of the CAM are: to assist the University's Project Manager (PM) as the University’s on-site representative for the construction phase; to coordinate all construction phase Consultants; to coordinate other Consultants, the A/E, and the Construction Manager (CM) / General Contractor (GC) communications; to expedite resolution of all conflicts; to perform additional quality assurance oversight (such as inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection) and other administrative oversight. The CAM shall be provided copies of all written decisions and notices to the CM/GC and information and notices from the CM/GC. All activities not specifically required to be performed by the A/E may be performed by the CAM or by the University’s other Consultants. B. The University may also remove/reassign from the A/E to any selected Consultants certain inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection, and administrative duties and authority. The University shall provide the CM/GC and the A/E information in writing defining the limits of the selected Consultants’ authority. 1.3 GOVERNING AUTHORITY AND APPLICABILITY OF PROVISIONS A. 1.4 The CM/GC shall abide by all University regulations and amendments and all other applicable laws and regulations of the Commonwealth, including those that may be issued during the Contract. This governing authority applies to all employees of the CM/GC and all Trade/Subcontractors. In particular, regulations pertaining to sexual harassment, drug and alcohol use, abusive and offensive language, and smoking should be noted. RESUMES FOR CM/GC’S PERSONNEL A. The CM/GC shall submit to the University, at least one week prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, a resume for each principal staff member who will work on the project, including PM, Superintendent, Foreman, and Quality Control Representative. B. Resumes shall include, at a minimum, educational background, length of time with the company, and past work experience, with an outline of responsible positions held. C. The University reserves the right to interview and to reject any staff member for specific reasons and request new resume submissions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01000 - 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.5 SWAM FIRM UTILIZATION A. It is the policy of the University to contribute to the establishment, preservation, and strengthening of SWaM firms and to encourage their participation in University procurement activities. Towards that end, the University encourages CMs/GCs to provide for the participation of SWaM firms through partnerships, joint ventures, subcontracts, and other contractual opportunities. The University has a SWaM firm overall participation goal of 40% for procurement opportunities. Where it is practicable for any portion of awarded contracts to be subcontracted to other firms, the University encourages the use of SWaM firms. B. Names of SWaM firms currently registered with and certified by the Virginia Department of Minority Business Enterprises (DMBE) and desiring to work at the University may be obtained from the Office of Supplier Diversity in the University Department of Procurement Services. See http://www.procurement.virginia.edu/pagediversity for additional information. C. If the total amount of a contract with the University exceeds $100,000, Contractors shall complete and submit quarterly reports, on forms provided by the Office of Supplier Diversity in accordance with the University’s SWaM plan, to document Trade/Subcontractor and Supplier expenditures to SWaM firms in connection with the project. The successful firm shall provide the UVA SWaM Contract Administrator with the name of the responsible person within their organization who will be the SWaM contact and who will be responsible for reporting verifiable SWaM expenditures resulting from this contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01000 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Name of Project: UVA UH HEP Office Suite. B. University: The Commonwealth of Virginia and The Rector and Visitors of the University of Virginia (collectively referred to as the University or Owner). C. Architect of Record: HKS, Inc. 1.2 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. 1.3 The University will furnish the products identified on the drawings. The work for this project includes supplying the labor, material, coordination, and supervision to install these products as per the Contract Documents and General Conditions. ASSIGNED WORK A. 1.4 No assigned work required. CONCURRENT UNIVERSITY OCCUPANCY A. Continued Occupancy - Adjacent Areas: 1. 2. 3. 1.5 The remainder of the facility will be occupied by UVA personnel during entire construction period for conduct of normal operations. CM/GC shall cooperate with University in scheduling operations to minimize conflict. Perform work so as not to interfere with operations of occupied areas. See 01010.1.6D for smoking restriction. CM/GC USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Access to Site: Limited, to be reviewed with project manager. B. Emergency Building Exits: Maintain existing emergency exits during construction. C. If Construction Operations: Limited to areas shown on Drawings. D. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: 7AM-6PM, Monday through Friday. Work outside these times shall not be construed as constituting additional cost to University. Work hours in the vicinity of occupied patient sleeping areas is restricted to 8AM-6PM all days. No deliveries shall occur between 7AM-8:30AM and 4PM-5:30PM. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01010 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK E. Night Work Hours: Defined as between 6PM and 7AM, Monday though Friday. Request permission in writing at least five (5) days in advance for work at these times. Work at these times must be authorized in advance in writing before proceeding. Work executed during these times shall not be construed as “overtime” and shall not incur additional cost to University. F. Weekend Work Hours: Defined as between 6PM Friday and 7AM Monday. Request permission in writing at least 5 days in advance for work at these times. Work at these times must be authorized in advance in writing before proceeding. Work executed during these times shall not be construed as “overtime” and shall not incur additional cost to University. G. The CM/GC shall schedule the remodel work within the existing building to avoid interference with occupied areas. Submit schedule and summary of applicable Work within occupied areas and obtain University approval not less than seven (7) days prior to commencement of such work. H. The CM/GC shall coordinate access to and security of existing mechanical/electrical equipment spaces with the University. I. Staging Areas: Coordinate with University Project Manager. 1.6 OPERATIONS OUTSIDE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS A. Use of certain passageways and other areas, outside of defined limits of operation will be granted on intermittent basis as required and requested in advance (7 days minimum). B. The CM/GC shall comply with designated travel paths, staging areas, dumpster locations, and other restricted items indicated on the Drawings. C. Dining: Only University dining facilities open to the public will be available for CM/GC use. D. Occupied University buildings and grounds, including the construction limits, are a non-smoking environment. Smoking is allowed only in designated areas. For Health System projects, see http://www.healthsystem.virginia.edu/internet/environment/media/SmokingMap.pdf for prohibited smoking areas. 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. 1.8 Construct Work in stages to accommodate University’s occupancy requirements during the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with the University. UTILITY OUTAGES A. Authority to schedule power outages must be obtained from the University. The University will coordinate the interruption of service with the CM/GC and all University parties affected. B. In all cases the CM/GC shall keep utility and service outages to minimum and only after written approval of University is received. C. CM/GC requests for outages shall include an identification of areas that will be affected by proposed outage. D. The CM/GC shall make requests a minimum of 5 working days (preferred 10 days for extensive outages in advance of proposed outage. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01010 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK E. All existing fire protection equipment and fire alarm system shall remain operational during construction. If temporary shutdown is necessary, system shall be returned to operational condition as soon as possible and no later than the end of each working day prior to the CM/GC leaving the site. CM/GC is to notify the University Fire Marshal prior to any necessary shutdowns. Shutdown shall not affect other areas not involved with this construction project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01010 - 3 SUMMARY OF WORK HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01010 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01015 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS AND CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECURITY AND PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION A. Employees of CM/GC and Trade CM/GCs are required to wear University approved numbered identification badges on outer garments above elbow level while on University premises. B. CM/GC or Trade CM/GC personnel not complying with this requirement will be denied access to University or will be escorted off premises by University security personnel. C. The CM/GC is required to provide the University a complete list of workers that will be on the job site five working days prior to the start of work. Any changes in site personnel must be reported to the University in writing immediately. Include on list names and badge numbers for each worker on site. 1.2 BURNING AND WELDING OPERATIONS A. 1.3 The CM/GC shall provide the University 5 working days advance notice for all burning and welding operations. HOT WORKS OPERATIONS A. 1.4 The CM/GC shall follow all University and VOSHA standards/regulations on Hot Works operations and is subject to VOSHA inspections. CM/GCs certify that they have a Hot Works program in place with proper oversight that includes recognition of the risk of after-hours ignition from Hot Work and the requirement for a fire watch. SAFETY PROCEDURES A. 1.5 Area of Work is subject to Interim Life Safety Measures as per JCAHO requirements. WORK SITE PROTECTION A. The CM/GC shall provide padding at corridor walls when there is a possibility of damage. B. The CM/GC shall provide minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard protection at carpeted areas when they will be subject to heavy rolling loads. C. The CM/GC shall prohibit traffic on lawn and landscaped areas. 1.6 ELECTRONIC DEVICES A. Use of cellphones and pagers is strictly prohibited in all Health System buildings. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01015 - 1 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1.7 BLASTING A. Blasting is strictly prohibited on the University grounds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01015 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01027 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS - INVOICING A. Unless otherwise directed by the University representative, please deliver one completed copy of your HECO-12, Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (invoice) to the University PM or CAM. They are responsible for delivering the approved invoice to the Facilities Management Fiscal Technician, (575 Alderman Rd, Charlottesville, VA, P.O. Box 400726, Charlottesville, VA 22904-4726). A computer-generated replica of the form is acceptable; however, signatures must be original. Incorrect and/or nonconforming invoices may need to be returned for correction, thus delaying payment. B. Include all of the following information on the Schedule of Values: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Project Title: HEP UHOFFICE SUITE Project Code No: N/A UVA FP&C PIMS # P02990 UVA Purchase Order # TBD* UVA Work Order # 1496104 PIMS Acct Code # _________* (Your) Federal Identification (FEIN) # __________ (*This information is located on the formal Notice to Proceed and may also be obtained from or confirmed from the Contract Administrator for Construction, 434 982-0258 or Senior Fiscal Technician, 434 982-5856.) 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of CM/GC's Construction Schedule. 1. 2. B. Correlate line items with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01027 - 1 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES 2. 3. Provide a separate line item for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. 4. 1.3 Temporary facilities and other items that are not direct cost of work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items or distributed as general overhead expense. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by University. 1. 2. 3. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between University and CM/GC. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement or established at the preconstruction conference. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of CM/GC. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. a. b. 4. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and CM/GC's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. Affidavit of Payment: With each Application for Payment, submit CO-13 “Affidavit of Payment of Claims” form from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. a. b. c. d. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full affidavit. University reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit affidavit. Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with CM/GC's affidavit for construction period covered by the application. 1) e. Submit final Application for Payment with or proceeded by affidavit from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. Forms: Submit affidavit on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to University. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01027 - 2 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES 5. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 6. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. b. 7. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for University occupancy of designated portions of the Work. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 1.4 List of subcontractors. Schedule of Values. CM/GC's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of CM/GC's staff assignments. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. Universitys HECO-13.2 “Certificate of Completion by CM/GC” form. Evidence that claims have been settled. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when University took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS - CHANGES A. CM/GC's itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed change in Contract Price shall be provided on relevant University forms as indicated in Division 00 Section "Additional Documents". B. CM/GC shall participate as a member of the Board on Changes for all changes valued over $250,000. The University will appoint the members of each Board on Changes which will include but not be limited to the CM/GC, the A/E, the University Construction Program Manager, PM and CAM. C. Minor Changes in the Work: Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architects standard form. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01027 - 3 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES D. University-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. 2. Proposal Requests are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within time specified in Proposal Request and after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. b. c. E. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include an updated CM/GC's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. CM/GC-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, CM/GC may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include an updated CM/GC's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. F. Proposal Request Form: UVA standard form will be used for Proposal Requests. G. Allowance Adjustment: Base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. Allow for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. 2. 3. Include installation costs only where indicated as part of the allowance. Prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. University reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01027 - 4 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES H. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or CM/GC's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. 2. Do not include CM/GC's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. No change to CM/GC's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lowerpriced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. I. Change Order Procedures: On University's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of University and CM/GC on Architect’s standard form. J. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on Architect’s standard form. Construction Change Directive instructs CM/GC to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. 2. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. a. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01027 - 5 ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS TO APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT AND CHANGES HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01027 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01039 PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project. COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other CM/GCs to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components with other CM/GCs to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. Preparation of CM/GC's Construction Schedule. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Preinstallation meetings. Project closeout activities. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01039 - 1 PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. 2. 1.4 Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. Indicate required installation sequences. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Facilities Planning and Construction will schedule a preconstruction meeting before starting construction, at a University location convenient to University, CM/GC, and Architect, no later than 15 days after date of “Notice to Proceed”. 1. 2. 3. 1.5 Attendees: Authorized representatives of University, Architect, and their consultants; CM/GC and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of the Work. The preconstruction meeting, required by the General Conditions, will be scheduled by the University. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies to the participants. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Conduct a preinstallation meeting at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration. Record significant meeting discussions, agreements, and disagreements. Do not proceed with installation if the meeting cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the meeting at earliest feasible date. CM/GC to schedule preinstallation meetings for all HVAC systems/components and any other systems as required by the Project Specifications. Such meetings should include the Architect, the project engineer for the discipline, the CAM, the Inspector, a University facility operator, any commissioning consultant, the CM/GC’s PM and Superintendent, the Mechanical Trade CM/GC’s PM and Superintendent, and a representative of the major Supplier/Manufacturer. CM/GC to require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. CM/GC to notify Architect and University at least four working days in advance of meeting date. CM/GC to prepare agenda and summary to facilitate: 1. 2. Review of all required submittal approvals. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01039 - 2 PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 3. 4. B. 1.6 Review coordination with related work. Review of all required tests and reports. CM/GC to record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with copies to those affected by decisions made. PROGRESS MEETINGS A. CM/GC to schedule progress meetings throughout progress of the Work at regular intervals, minimum of two per month. The monthly pay meeting, required by the General Conditions, may serve as a progress meeting. Coordinate scheduled meeting dates with University and Architect. B. CM/GC to provide a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report on projected work for the next two weeks. C. Attendance Required: Job Superintendent, major Trade CM/GCs and Suppliers, representatives of the University and the Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Schedule. Issues. Requests for Information. Requests for proposal. Estimated Change Orders. Change Orders. Submittals. Applications for Payment. Safety, Security and Conduct. University coordination. E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies to participants. F. The Architect will preside at all progress meetings 1.7 MONTHLY PAY MEETING A. The monthly pay meeting, required by the General Conditions, will be scheduled by the Architect. The Architect will record minutes and distribute copies to the participants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01039 - 3 PROJECT COORDINATION AND MEETINGS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01039 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. 2. 1.3 Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. PROCEDURES A. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for accepted alternates and the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate accepted alternates. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using accepted alternates with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. Cost information, including change in the Contract Sum. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01230 - 1 ALTERNATES B. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. C. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. D. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. E. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. F. Acceptance of Alternates will be exercised at option of Owner in any order or combination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates Listing: Refer to the drawings. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01230 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS (Reference General Conditions §24.) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. 1.2 See HECOM Definitions §2.2. SUBMITTAL FORM AND LOG A. CM/GC shall use either the Submittal Register at http://dgs.state.va.us/tabid/820/Default.aspx?udt_1673_param_detail=274 or one of its own making acceptable to the University. B. CM/GC shall maintain in field office a copy of submittal schedule and log of submittals indicating current status of each item. C. CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect for review of submittals. Except for special submittals, such as those with design calculations and/or detailed shop drawings, submittals will be reviewed in an average time of 10 working days. D. Schedule finish sample Submittals for approval of color, texture, graining, or other finish at least 30 days before purchase, assembly, or fabrication. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. CM/GC shall bind in complete sets. Transmit reproducible transparencies in roll form to eliminate folding. Folding of prints is acceptable. B. CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect for review of shop drawings. Except for special submittals, such as those with design calculations and/or detailed shop drawings, submittals will be reviewed in an average time of 10 working days. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise CM/GC when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. C. CM/GC shall present in clear and thorough manner. Title each drawing with Project name and number, identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail schedule, or room number of Contract Documents. D. CM/GC shall show detail, materials, dimensions, thickness, methods of assembly attachments, relation to adjoining work, and other pertinent data and information. E. CM/GC shall verify dimensions and field conditions. Clearly indicate field dimensions and field conditions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 1 SUBMITTALS F. CM/GC shall not use Contract Drawings for shop drawings. Provide original shop drawings with changes from Contract Drawings clearly indicated. G. Distribution 1. 2. 3. H. Definitions: 1. 2. I. Duplicate and distribute reproductions of shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals which bear A/E's stamp of approval to the Project record documents file, the Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, other affected CM/GCs, and other entities requiring information. Provide each testing and inspection agency one set of approved submittals for their exclusive use in providing specified quality control testing and inspection services; refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Control and Quality Assurance". The University is to receive two copies of all approved submittals, shop drawings and product data. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. J. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. K. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. 2. 3. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record CM/GC's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of CM/GC. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Unique identifier, including revision number. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 2 SUBMITTALS j. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Other necessary identification. L. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. M. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. N. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than CM/GC. O. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Submit minimum of four copies of Product Data until final acceptance. Submit one additional copy of Structural, Mechanical and Electrical items. Three copies of the Product Data will be returned to the CM/GC after Architect's review. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 2.2 Manufacturer's written recommendations. Manufacturer's product specifications. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Submit minimum of one reproducible and two prints of Shop Drawings until final acceptance. Submit one additional print of Structural, Mechanical and Electrical items. Reproducible and one print will be returned to the CM/GC after Architect's review. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 3 SUBMITTALS 2. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 2.3 Dimensions. Identification of products. Fabrication and installation drawings. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. Templates and patterns. Schedules. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. SAMPLES A. Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.4 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return two submittals with options selected. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. 2. Number of Copies: Submit one copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 4 SUBMITTALS 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Control and Quality Assurance." CM/GC's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and Universitys, and other information specified. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 5 SUBMITTALS 19. 20. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factoryauthorized service representative's tests and inspections. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CM/GC'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. 1. 2. B. Architect will return submittals without processing if they do not contain CM/GC’s stamp, if they are not initialed or signed by authorized person, if they are not dated, or if it becomes evident that they have not been properly reviewed. Delays resulting therefrom are the responsibility of the CM/GC. 1. 2. 3.2 Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. ACTION STAMP A. The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: 1. 2. 3. 4. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Accepted as Noted," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the Architect's notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Accepted" or "Revise Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the Architect's notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, for special processing or other CM/GC activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Not Reviewed" or "Not Reviewed; submittal not required by Contract Documents". Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Samples or Product Data which deviates from the Contract Documents does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum. Submit in writing at the time of submission any changes to the Contract Sum affected by such Shop Drawings, Samples or Product Data, otherwise, claim for extras will not be considered. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 6 SUBMITTALS 3.3 PARTIAL SUBMITTALS A. 3.4 Architect will not review partial or incomplete submittals. Complete submittals for each item are required. Submittals will not be considered official until it is complete in every respect. Delays resulting from partial submittals are the responsibility of the CM/GC. RESUBMITTALS A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial submittals; identify changes made since previous submittal. B. Architect will record time required to review resubmittals after original submittal and first resubmittal. University retains the right to require the CM/GC to reimburse University for charges to Architect and Architect's Consultants for reviewing submittal more than 2 times. 3.5 DISTRIBUTION A. Duplicate and distribute reproductions of shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals which bear A/E's stamp of approval to the Project record documents file, the Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, other affected CM/GCs, and other entities requiring information. B. Provide each testing and inspection agency one set of approved submittals for their exclusive use in providing specified quality control testing and inspection services; refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Control and Quality Assurance". C. The University is to receive two copies of all approved submittals, shop drawings and product data. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 7 SUBMITTALS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01300 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01312 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section specifies administrative procedures for preparation and submission of project communications documents. FORMAT A. Submit Letters, Memoranda, and Fax Communications in formats acceptable to the Architect. B. Submit E–Mail, Internet and Project Management Software Communications in forms and formats acceptable to and approved by the Architect. 1.3 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) FORM AND LOG A. The CM/GC shall use the RFI form at the end of this section or use an alternate form acceptable to the University. B. CM/GC shall carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and installation of Work. Promptly advise Architect of any error, inconsistency, omission, or apparent discrepancy discovered. C. CM/GC shall allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect for handling queries and clarifications. D. If Architect is able to respond to a request for information by making specific reference to Drawing sheet or Specification Section, the University retains the right to require the CM/GC to reimburse University for charges of Architect and Architects Consultants for performing review services for the CM/GC. E. CM/GC shall maintain in field office a copy of the log of RFI’s indicating current status of each item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTS A. Letters, Memoranda, and Fax communications documents shall be submitted in a timely manner so as to facilitate project delivery and coordination. Routing of communications shall be as established in the Contract, the Contract Documents and the Pre-Construction Conference. Communications documents shall be transmitted or forwarded in a manner consistent with the HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01312 - 1 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS schedule and progress of the work. B. E–Mail Communications, Internet Communications, and Project Management Software programs must be compatible with the Architect’s and University’s computer systems and equipment. The responsibility for all costs for management of these systems, including, but not limited to, licensing, on site training or other training necessary for the proper operation of such systems, shall be by the CM/GC. The CM/GC shall keep written records and hard file copies of all electronic communications. Failure of the CM/GC to keep such records shall waive the CM/GC’s right to rely on such communications and such communications shall be deemed to have not taken place. C. RFI (Request for Information – CM/GC) shall be defined and limited to a request from the CM/GC seeking interpretation or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Such requests shall comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. RFI requests shall be submitted in a timely manner, well in advance of related work, and allow sufficient time for the resolution of issues relating to the request for interpretation or clarification. CM/GC shall schedule the submission of RFI’s so as to moderate and manage the flow of RFI requests. RFI’s shall be submitted in a manner consistent with the schedule and progress of the work, and shall not be submitted in a sporadic and/or excessive manner. RFI requests shall be numbered in a sequential manner and contain a detailed description of the areas of work requiring interpretation or clarification. Include drawing and specification references, sketches, technical data, brochures, or other supporting data as deemed necessary by the Architect, for the Architect to provide the interpretations and clarifications requested. The CM/GC shall include a “Proposed Solution” to the issue requiring interpretation or clarification. RFI’s submitted to the CM/GC by Sub-Contractors, vendors, suppliers, or other parties to the work shall be reviewed by the CM/GC prior to submission to the Architect. If the Architect deems that such RFI requests have not been adequately reviewed by the CM/GC, such requests will be returned to the CM/GC for further action. Sub-Contractor’s RFI shall contain a “Proposed Solution”. RFI requests shall not contain submittals, substitutions requests, routine communications, correspondence, memos, claims, or any information required by other areas of the Contract Documents. RFI requests containing such information will be returned to the CM/GC without action by the Architect. RFI requests are limited to a request for interpretation or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Interpretations provided by the Architect shall not change the requirements of the Contract or the Contract Documents. If the CM/GC determines that the Architect’s response to an RFI gives cause for a change in the Contract or the Contract Documents, the CM/GC shall promptly, within 5 working days, give written notice to the Architect of request for adjustments. Requests for adjustments to the Contract shall be submitted in a manner consistent with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. If the Architect, after review, determines that any RFI has been submitted in an incomplete manner, is unnecessary, or does not otherwise comply with the requirements of this Section, the RFI will be returned without action to the CM/GC. The CM/GC shall delete the original submittal date from the RFI log and enter a new submittal date at the time of re-submittal. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01312 - 2 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS D. RFI (Request for Information – Architect) shall be defined as a request by the Architect for information relating to the obligations of the CM/GC under the Contract. 1. 2. After receipt of an RFI the CM/GC shall provide a written response to the Architect within 5 working days. Responses shall be thorough, complete and shall contain all information requested by the Architect. An RFI shall be limited to a request by the Architect for information related to the project. The RFI shall not be construed as authorizing or directing a change in the Contract or the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01312 - 3 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01312 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Date: RFI No: To: (Architect/Engineer) From: (General Contractor) Project Name: UVA UH HEP Office Suite Subject: Spec Section: Drawing No: REQUEST: The above request has been researched and is not answered by the contract documents. Name: Title: Signature: RESPONSE: Name: Title: cc: (University Manager) HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 Signature: THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category (action or informational). Name of subcontractor. Description of the Work covered. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. CM/GC's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. E. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate CM/GCs. Coordinate CM/GC's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. 2. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each construction activity with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. 2. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and CM/GC's Construction Schedule. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of CM/GC's Construction Schedule. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01320 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION B. CM/GC's Construction Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Ganttchart-type, CM/GC's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. 2. 3. 4. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: a. b. c. d. 5. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in CM/GC's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 7 days for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. a. b. c. Work by University: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by University. Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of limitations of continued occupancies, uninterruptible services, use of premises restrictions, and provisions for future construction. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. 6. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 7. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. C. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording events at Project site, including list of subcontractors; accidents; stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses; orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction; and equipment or system tests and startups. D. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01320 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. CM/GC's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. 2. 3. 4. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, University, separate CM/GCs, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by CM/GC with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. a. b. B. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Photographer: CM/GC shall take electronic construction photographs at appropriate times during the project. Minimum Digital Camera Resolution: 1800 x 1200 dpi (dots per inch) @ 72 dpi resolution. Acceptable Electronic File Format: .jpg, .tif., .tiff., .tga., jpe., or .png. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points. Show existing conditions adjacent to property. Submit photos as required under “Submittals” Article. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. Submit photos as required under “Submittals” Article. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Submit photos as required under “Submittals” Article. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01320 - 3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01320 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01350 ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations is included in Division 02 Section “Selective Demolition”. B. The following Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM) as established by the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO) shall be implemented, documented and enforced in and adjacent to all construction areas: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Ensure that exits provide free and unobstructed egress. Personnel shall receive training, and the Hospital shall be notified if alternative exits must be designated. Buildings/areas under construction must maintain escape facilities for construction workers at all times. Means of egress in construction areas must be inspected daily. Ensure free and unobstructed access to emergency department/service and for emergency forces. Ensure that fire alarm, detection, and suppression systems are not impaired. A temporary, but equivalent, system shall be provided, and the Hospital shall be notified, when any fire system is impaired. Temporary systems must be inspected and tested monthly. Ensure temporary construction partitions are smoke tight and built of non-combustible or limited combustible materials that will not contribute to the development or spread of fire. Provide additional fire-fighting equipment and use training for personnel. Prohibit smoking in or adjacent to all construction areas. Develop and enforce storage, housekeeping, and debris-removal practices that reduce the flammable and combustible fire load of the building to lowest level necessary for daily operations. Conduct a minimum of two fire drills per shift per quarter. Increase hazard surveillance of buildings, grounds, and equipment with special attention to excavations, construction areas, construction storage, and field offices. Train personnel, and notify the Hospital, when structural or compartmentation features of fire safety are compromised. Conduct organization wide safety education programs to assure awareness of and (LSC) deficiencies, construction hazards, and these ILSM. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. New Materials: As specified in individual Sections. B. Match existing products and work for patching and extending work. C. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product, finish, or type of work, requires that patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make Work complete and consistent with existing quality. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01350 - 1 ALTERATIONS PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new work. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. C. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished work. D. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. E. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. F. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. G. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage to existing finishes and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to original or specified condition. H. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes. Install products as specified in individual Sections. I. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, make a smooth and even transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. J. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. K. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. L. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas. M. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching”. N. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. O. Finishes: Finish surfaces as specified in individual Sections. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. P. Cleaning: In addition to cleaning specified in Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures”, clean University-occupied areas of work daily. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01350 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the A/E. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to fabrication and installation procedures. 1. 2. 3. E. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. F. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor’s quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the A/E, University, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. Quality-control services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01400 - 1 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 10. 11. 12. 13. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. G. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. H. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. K. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. L. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES A. University testing and laboratory services: The University shall employ and pay for independent testing and laboratory services, as specified in individual Specification Sections and as required under Chapter 17 Structural Tests and Inspections of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code, and required by the other governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Contractor’s responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity. B. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. 2. 3. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, to perform inspections, tests, and similar quality control services which are designated in the technical specifications as a Contractor requirement to provide. Where the University has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing and inspection of a part of the Work and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element; the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the University unless otherwise agreed in writing with the University. Failure and Re-testing: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services, the Contractor shall be responsible for re-testing where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements. Removal and replacement Work necessitated by such noncompliance shall be at the Contractor's HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 4. expense. When inspections or tests cannot be performed after proper notification and at the fault of the Contractor, rescheduling costs will be the Contractor’s responsibility. Coordination: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services, the Contractor shall coordinate, with each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services, the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor shall coordinate with each agency’s activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. The Contractor is responsible for: a. b. c. 5. C. Protection and Repair: Regardless of the original assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services, repair and protection are the Contractor’s responsibility. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. Contractor’s Quality Control: The Contractor shall have designated a single Quality Control (QC) Representative, not the Job Superintendent or Job PM, responsible for the overall quality of workmanship and compliance with specifications. The Contractor shall submit for approval a resume for the Quality Control Representative in accordance with Section 01000 “Resumes for Contractors Personnel”. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. Notifying the A/E and testing agency 48 hours in advance of operations requiring testing services. Providing incidental labor and facilities to facilitate inspections, tests, sample taking and appropriate sample storage. The QC Representative shall be responsible to observe and certify the performance of contractor tests and pre-inspections identified on the Contractor’s Quality Control, Required Certification Log – (Sample Attached). The QC Representative may elect to use an alternate expert to observe / certify performance. The QC Representative shall be qualified to monitor construction quality by experience and training. The Contractor shall submit for approval a Quality Assurance Plan at the Preconstruction Meeting. The plan shall include identification and resumes of the Quality Control Representative and any subordinate experts to the QC Representative. The plan shall also address the QC Representative’s on site presence and participation in preinstallation, and Trade Contractor meetings. The plan shall include a proposed bi-weekly Contractor’s Quality Control report. This report shall include results of contractor certifications, University's test results, post installation inspection results, and updated Contractor’s Quality Control, Required Certification Log. The contractor shall use the Contractor’s Quality Control, Required Certification log as a guide to track and plan for required certified pre- or post application inspections. The QC Representative shall have the authority to stop work at any time quality problems necessitate. This authority shall be delineated in a letter of appointment from a company officer. The letter shall be included in the Quality Assurance Plan. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. 1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01400 - 3 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 2. 3. 4. 5. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected work. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. F. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. G. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. I. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. Access to the Work. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies where specified. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01400 - 4 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3 TEST AND INSPECTION CERTIFIED REPORTS A. For Contractor provided services, the Contractor shall forward a certified written report from the independent agency of each inspection, test or similar service within one week of the test date and with 4 copies, 2 copies for University and 2 copies for Architect. Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 1.4 Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. Designation of the Work and test method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete inspection or test data. Test results and an interpretation of test results. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. Professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting. QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF SERVICE A. All Testing Service Agencies, engaging in inspection and testing services, including independent testing laboratories, shall be prequalified as complying with “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification” by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and shall specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. Each Service Agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Project is located. B. Additionally each laboratory shall: 1. 2. 3. Comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740 and E329. Maintain full-time registered engineer on staff to review and supervise services. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) or accepted values of natural physical constants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. 2. 3. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01400 - 5 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE B. CM/GC’s QC REQUIRED CERTIFICATION LOG – sample not all items may apply Section Paragraph 07141 3.1 07210 07270 07532 3.1 3.1 3.1 07901 08212 08462 3.2 3.3 3.1 3.1 3.1 0880 09300 09550 09660 09680 09950 11132 14100 16030 3.7B 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.1B 3.2C 3.2E 3.1 3.1B 3.1B 3.1B 3.2A 15210 15220 Letter 3.2C 3.3C 3.4G 3.4H 3.4I 1.4 3.1 3.7 3.1A 3.1B 3.23 15761 15770 3.1E 3.1B 15050 15060 15899 3.1E 3.1F 3.1I 3.1C 3.1I 3.2 3.1C 16470 16623 16721 3.1 3.1 3.2 16722 3.2 17000 3.4D 15820 15846 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing Building Insulation Firestopping (CSPE) Single-ply membrane roofing Joint Sealants Stile and Rail Wood Doors Swinging Automatic Entrance Doors Glazing Tile Wood Flooring Resilient Tile Flooring Carpet Wall Coverings Projection Screens Dumbwaiters (if picked up) Adjusting, Balancing, and System Testing Demolition Pipe and Pipe Fittings Vibration Isolation Water Treatment Plumbing General Provisions Fan Coil Units Packaged Air Handling Units Fans Pre-fabricated Ductwork Adjustable Frequency Drive Units Panelboards Elevator Equipment Wiring Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Intrusion Detection and Security Access System Building Automation System Certification Requirement Certification Record Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Pre-application Post application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Post application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Pre-application Post application Post application Pre-application Letter Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Post application Post application Pre-application Pre-application Post application Pre-application Pre-application Post application Periodic Post application Post application Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Bi-weekly CQC report Letter Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Letter Post application Post application Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Post application Post application Pre-application Post application Pre-application Post application Post application Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Letter Post application Pre-application Post application Bi-weekly CQC report Bi-weekly CQC report Letter Post application Letter Post application Letter END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01400 - 6 Date Complete d [Periodic] UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01420 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes reference standards, definitions and specification format and content. DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract and HECOM B. Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to requirements expressed by graphic representations, or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Terms such as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are used to help the user locate the reference. C. Directed: The term “directed” is a command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including “requested,” “authorized,” “selected,” “approved,” and “permitted” have the same meaning as “directed.” D. Approved: The term “approved”, when used to convey Architect's action on CM/GC's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. Regulations: The term “regulations” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. Furnish: The term “furnish” means supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. Install: The term “install” describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. Provide: The term “provide” means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. Submitted: The terms “submitted”, “reported”, “satisfactory” and similar words and phrases means submitted to Architect, reported to Architect and similar phrases. J. Installer: An “Installer” is the CM/GC or another entity engaged by the CM/GC, as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 1 REFERENCES K. Experienced: The term “experienced”, when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authority having jurisdiction. L. Trades: Using terms such as “carpentry” does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. M. Project Site: The term "Project site" means the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. N. Testing Agencies: A “testing agency” is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: Divisions 02 through 49 of these Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 50-Division format and CSI/CSC’s “Master Format” numbering system while Divisions 00 and 01 of these Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 16-Division format and CSI/CSC’s “Master Format” numbering system. 1. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 1.4 Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the CM/GC. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the CM/GC, or by others when so noted. The words “shall” "shall be" or “shall comply with”, depending on the context are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 2 REFERENCES B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. E. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. F. Industry Organization Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications and other Contract Documents they shall mean the name of a trade association, standards-developing organization or other entity in the context of referencing a standard or publication. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract Documents, mean the associated names. 1. 2. AA AAADM AABC AAMA AAN AASHTO AATCC ABMA ACI ACPA ADC AEIC AFPA AF&PA AGA AGC AHA AHAM AI AIA AISC AISI AITC ALA Where other Sections of the Specifications require that a product, material, or installation complies with specified industry standard, the CM/GC shall obtain copies directly from the publication source, and submit copies of standards at same time as submittal of other specified submittals. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed, but not assured, to be accurate and up to date as of the date of Contract Documents. Refer to Gale Research’s "Encyclopedia of Associations," or Columbia Book’s “National Trade and Professional Association of the U.S.”. Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers Associated Air Balance Council American Architectural Manufacturers Association American Association of Nurserymen American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists American Bearing Manufacturers Association American Concrete Institute/ACI International American Concrete Pipe Association Air Diffusion Council Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) American Forest & Paper Association American Forest & Paper Association American Gas Association Associated General Contractors of America (The) American Hardboard Association Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers Asphalt Institute American Institute of Architects (The) American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. American Iron and Steel Institute American Institute of Timber Construction American Laminators Association HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 3 www.aluminum.org www.taol.com/aaadm www.aabchq.com www.aamanet.org (See ANLA) www.aashto.org www.aatcc.org www.abma-dc.org www.aci-int.org www.concrete-pipe.org www.aeic.org (See AF&PA) www.afandpa.org www.aga.org www.agc.org www.ahardbd.org www.aham.org www.asphaltinstitute.org www.aiaonline.org www.aisc.org www.steel.org (See LMA) REFERENCES ALCA ALSC AMCA ANLA ANSI AOSA APA APA API ARI ASCA ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASSE ASTM AWCI AWCMA AWI AWPA AWS AWWA BHMA BIA BIFMA CCC CCFSS CDA CEA CFFA CGA CGSB CIMA CISCA CISPI CLFMI CPA CPPA CRI CRSI CSA CSI CSSB CTI DHI EIA/TIA EIMA EJMA FCI FGMA FM FMG GA Associated Landscape Contractors of America American Lumber Standard Committee Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. American Nursery & Landscape Association (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) American National Standards Institute Association of Official Seed Analysts APA-The Engineered Wood Association Architectural Precast Association American Petroleum Institute Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute Architectural Spray Coaters Association American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) American Society of Sanitary Engineering American Society for Testing and Materials AWCI International (Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries International) American Window Covering Manufacturers Association Architectural Woodwork Institute American Wood-Preservers' Association American Welding Society American Water Works Association Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association Brick Industry Association (The) BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) Carpet Cushion Council Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures Copper Development Association Inc. Canadian Electricity Association (The) Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. Compressed Gas Association Canadian General Standards Board Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute Composite Panel Association (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association Division of Plastics Pipe Institute Carpet and Rug Institute (The) Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) Division of Canadian Standards Association Construction Specifications Institute (The) Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau Cooling Tower Institute Door and Hardware Institute Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association EIFS Industry Members Association Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. Fluid Controls Institute Flat Glass Marketing Association Factory Mutual System FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) Gypsum Association HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 4 www.alca.org www.amca.org www.anla.org www.ansi.org www.zianet.com/AOSA www.apawood.org www.archprecast.org www.api.org www.ari.org www.ascassoc.com www.asce.org www.ashrae.org www.asme.org www.asse-plumbing.org www.astm.org www.awci.org (See WCMA) www.awinet.org www.awpa.com www.aws.org www.awwa.org www.buildershardware.com www.bia.org www.bifma.com www.carpetcushion.org www.umr.edu/~ccfss www.copper.org www.canelect.ca www.taol.com/cffa www.cganet.com www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb www.cellulose.org www.cisca.org www.cispi.org www.chainlinkinfo.com (under construction) www.pbmdf.com www.cppa-info.org www.carpet-rug.com www.crsi.org www.iasapprovals.org www.csinet.org www.cedarbureau.org www.cti.org www.dhi.org www.eia.org www.eifsfacts.com www.ejma.org www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org (See GANA) (See FMG) www.fmglobal.com www.gypsum.org REFERENCES GANA GRI GTA HI HI HMMA HPVA HPW IAS ICEA ICRI IEC IEEE IESNA IGCC ILI IRI ITS IWS KCMA LGSI LMA LPI LSGA MBMA MFMA MFMA MGPHO MHIA MIA ML/SFA MSS NAAMM NAAMM NACE NAIMA NAMI NAPM NBGQA NCMA NCPI NCTA NEBB NECA NeLMA NEMA NETA NFPA NFRC NGA NHLA NLGA NOFMA NPA NRCA NRMCA Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) Geosynthetic Research Institute Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America Hydraulic Institute Hydronics Institute Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. International Approval Services (See CSA International) Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. International Concrete Repair Institute International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (The) Insulating Glass Certification Council Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. HSB Industrial Risk Insurers Intertek Testing Services Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association Light Gage Structural Institute Laminating Materials Association (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) Lightning Protection Institute Laminated Safety Glass Association Metal Building Manufacturers Association Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization, Inc. Material Handling Industry of America Marble Institute of America Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (See SSMA) Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) North American Insulation Manufacturers Association National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. National Association of Photographic Manufacturers National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. National Concrete Masonry Association National Clay Pipe Institute National Cable Television Association National Environmental Balancing Bureau National Electrical Contractors Association Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association National Electrical Manufacturers Association InterNational Electrical Testing Association National Fire Protection Association National Fenestration Rating Council National Glass Association National Hardwood Lumber Association National Lumber Grades Authority National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association National Particleboard Association National Roofing Contractors Association National Ready Mixed Concrete Association HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 5 www.glasswebsite.com/gana www.drexel.edu/gri (See GANA) www.gamanet.org (See NAAMM) www.hpva.org www.icea.net www.icri.org www.iec.ch www.ieee.org www.iesna.org www.igcc.org www.iliai.com www.industrialrisk.com www.itsglobal.com www.kcma.org www.loseke.com www.lma.org www.lightning.org (See GANA) www.mbma.com www.maplefloor.org www.mgpho.org www.mhia.org www.marble-institute.com www.mss-hq.com www.naamm.org (See GANA) www.nace.org www.naima.org (See PIMA) www.nbgqa.com www.ncma.org www.ncpi.org www.ncta.com www.nebb.org www.necanet.org www.nelma.org www.nema.org www.electricnet.com/net www.nfpa.org www.nfrc.org www.glass.org www.natlhardwood.org www.nlga.org www.nofma.org (See CPA) www.nrca.net www.nrmca.org REFERENCES NSA NSF NTMA NWWDA PCI PDCA PDI PGI PIMA RCSC RFCI RIS RMA SAE SDI SDI SEFA SGCC SIGMA SJI SMA SMACNA SPFA SPI SPIB SPI/SPFD SPRI SSINA SSMA SSPC STI SWI SWRI TCA TIA/EIA TPI TPI UFAC UL UNI USITT USP WASTEC WCLIB WCMA WDMA WIC WMMPA WWPA National Stone Association NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (The) National Wood Window and Door Association Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Painting and Decorating Contractors of America Plumbing & Drainage Institute PVC Geomembrane Institute/Technology Program University of Illinois-Urbana Champaign Photographic & Imaging Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NAPM - National Association of Photographic Manufacturers) Research Council on Structural Connections (c/o AISC) Resilient Floor Covering Institute Redwood Inspection Service Division of the California Redwood Association Rubber Manufacturers Association SAE International Steel Deck Institute Steel Door Institute Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association Safety Glazing Certification Council Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association Steel Joist Institute Screen Manufacturers Association Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. Spray Polyurethane Foam Division SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute) Specialty Steel Industry of North America Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings Steel Tank Institute Steel Window Institute Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute Tile Council of America, Inc. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance Truss Plate Institute Turfgrass Producers International Upholstered Furniture Action Council Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. U.S. Pharmacopeia Waste Equipment Technology Association West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Formerly: AWCMA-American Window Covering Manufacturers Association) Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA-National Wood Window and Door Association) Woodwork Institute of California Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association Western Wood Products Association HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 6 www.aggregates.org www.nsf.org www.ntma.com (See WDMA) www.pci.org www.pdca.com www.pdionline.org //pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu www.pima.net www.boltcouncil.org (Contact by mail only) www.calredwood.org www.rma.org www.sae.org www.sdi.org www.steeldoor.org www.sefalabfurn.com www.sgcc.org www.sigmaonline.org/sigma www.steeljoist.org www.smacna.org www.sprayfoam.org www.plasticsindustry.org www.spib.org (See SPI) www.spri.org www.ssina.com www.ssma.com www.sspc.org www.steeltank.com www.steelwindows.com www.swrionline.org www.tileusa.com www.tiaonline.org www.turfgrasssod.org www.ufac.org www.ul.com //members.aol.com/unibell www.culturenet.ca/usitt www.usp.org www.wastec.org www.wclib.org www.windowcoverings.org www.wdma.com www.wicnet.org www.wmmpa.com www.wwpa.org REFERENCES G. Code Agency Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the following entities. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA CABO IAPMO ICBO ICC BOCA International, Inc. Council of American Building Officials International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials International Conference of Building Officials International Code Council (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SBCCI H. www.sbcci.org Federal Government Agency Abbreviations and Acronyms: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the following entities. Names and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADA ADAAG CE CFR CPSC CRD DOC DOD EPA FAA FCC FDA FED-STD FS FTMS GSA HUD LBL LBNL MILSPEC NCHRP NIST OSHA RUS TRB UFAS USDA USPS www.bocai.org (See ICC) www.iapmo.org www.icbo.org www.intlcode.org Americans with Disabilities Act. Americans with Disabilities ACT (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board Army Corps of Engineers Code of Federal Regulations Consumer Product Safety Commission Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station Department of Commerce Department of Defense DOD Specifications and Standards Environmental Protection Agency Federal Aviation Administration Department of Transportation Federal Communications Commission Food and Drug Administration Federal Standard Federal Specification (Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS) Federal Test Method Standard General Services Administration Department of Housing and Urban Development Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Military Specification and Standards National Cooperative Highway Research Program National Institute of Standards and Technology Occupational Safety & Health Administration (See CFR 29) Rural Utilities Service Transportation Research Board Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board Department of Agriculture Postal Service PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 7 (See ADAAG) www.access.board.gov CRD Standards www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr www.cpsc.gov www.wes.army.mil www.doc.gov //astimage.daps.dla.mil/online www.epa.gov www.faa.gov www.fcc.gov www.fda.gov (See FS) (See FS) www.gsa.gov www.hud.gov (See LBNL) www.lbl.gov (See DOD) (See TRB) www.nist.gov www.osha.gov (See USDA) www.nas.edu/trb www.access-board.gov www.usda.gov www.usps.gov REFERENCES HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01420 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 TEMPORARY MATERIALS A. 1.2 Temporary materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. University will provide the CM/GC with electricity for construction use. The CM/GC is responsible for coordinating work related electrical requirements and protecting the building within the limits of available electrical power, without compromising the University’s need for electricity. The CM/GC is responsible for energy conservation and reasonable construction use of electrical power. Should the University determine an unreasonable or excessive use of electricity, the CM/GC shall pay for additional power above the reasonable amount. Should the CM/GC's use of electricity required for work exceed the limits of available power in the building the CM/GC shall reduce power consumed and/or pay for such modifications as required to eliminate compromising the University's system. B. CM/GC shall provide branch distribution system from temporary power source with distribution boxes and outlets located so that power and lighting is available throughout active work areas. C. Permanent receptacles may be utilized during construction. D. Existing receptacles may be utilized as source of temporary electric service for remodeling work within existing building. E. CM/GC shall replace receptacle plates and wiring devices damaged during construction. F. CM/GC shall provide lighting to ensure safe construction operations and to allow proper finishing operations. G. Permanent lighting system may be utilized during construction. H. Existing lighting system may be utilized for temporary lighting for remodeling work within existing building. I. CM/GC shall restore permanent [and/or existing] lighting systems used during construction to new and/or original condition. Replace defective fixtures, controls, and other component parts. Clean fixtures. Replace lamps. Lighting shall not be directed skyward. J. All temporary wiring shall be removed before completion of project. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01500 - 1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.3 TEMPORARY HEATING COOLING AND VENTILATING A. Prior to enclosure, provide heating, cooling and ventilation as necessary to protect materials, products, and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. B. Enclosure is defined as state of construction when exterior walls are erected, doors and windows are installed and glazed, roof deck and roofing are complete, and when other openings in exterior envelope are equipped with temporary enclosures. C. Except where indicated otherwise in individual specification sections, maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 deg°F in construction areas. D. Provide heating, cooling and ventilation as necessary to maintain specified conditions during construction. E. Provide and pay for costs of supervision, operation, maintenance, fuel, and energy consumed. F. Use of permanent heating/ventilating and associated distribution systems will be permitted only upon meeting following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Verify that reasonable closures from the external environment exist. Equipment installed complete with accessories, started-up, maintained, serviced, and operated in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide and pay for regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. Operation of permanent systems or any portion thereof to provide temporary heat/ventilation does not constitute acceptance of system or such portion thereof. Time period contained in warranties for heating/ventilating systems shall begin on date of Substantial Completion as certified by A/E and shall not begin on date of use, unless such date is certified by A/E as date of Substantial Completion. Immediately before Substantial Completion, completely clean each permanent unit used, install new filters, and perform service functions required for placing units in use and qualifying for specified warranties. G. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. H. No permanent HVAC system shall be operated without the permanent filters and/or strainers. Upon substantial completion all filters and/or strainers shall be replaced with new filter/strainers. All temporary filters shall be removed prior to occupancy. 1.4 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE A. Provide and pay for telephone service to temporary field office at time of Project mobilization. B. Provide and pay for telephone service for use by construction personnel. C. Cellphones or radios shall be permitted for this project. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01500 - 2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.5 TEMPORARY WATER A. The University will provide the CM/GC with existing source(s) of water for construction use. The CM/GC is responsible for coordinating work related temporary water requirements and protecting the building within the limits of available water resources, without compromising the University’s need for water. The CM/GC is responsible for water conservation and reasonable construction use when utilizing temporary or permanent water supply systems. Should the University determine an unreasonable or excessive use of water, the CM/GC shall pay for water useage and related sewer costs above the reasonable amount. Should the CM/GC's use of water required for work exceed the limits of available water to the building the CM/GC shall reduce water consumed and/or pay for such modifications as required to eliminate compromising the University's system ability to meet water requirements for existing services. B. Responsible for connecting to the service point or system designated by the Facilities Operations Department, and for furnishing, installing, and removing all temporary service required for water during construction, including protection of potable water system. C. Extended branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. D. All temporary piping shall be removed before completion of the project. 1.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain temporary sanitary facilities and enclosures. B. Existing and new permanent facilities are not available for use. 1.7 TEMPORARY ELEVATORS A. CM/GC requests for use of existing elevators must be submitted to the University for approval and certify that during construction the CM/GC will comply with the following: 1. 2. 1.8 Furnish, install, and maintain temporary protection of existing components, including cab and entrances. Remove temporary protection devices after temporary use is no longer required; Restore elevator system to original condition; Replace damaged and worn components. TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. 1.9 CM/GC can establish an onsite office only within the construction area of this project and only in such a way that it does not impede any of the project occupancies. TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CLOSURES A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-ofway and for public access to existing building. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01500 - 3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS C. Interior Closures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.10 Provide temporary barriers to separate construction areas from University occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust into occupied areas, to prevent entry of unauthorized persons in construction areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. Construct of adequate framing and surface with non-combustible materials having closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. Closures with fire rated corridors shall meet fire-rating equivalents. Paint surfaces exposed to view in occupied areas in colors directed by the Architect. TEMPORARY PARKING A. Temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel are not available. B. Existing on-site streets and parking facilities may not be used by construction personnel. C. Parking violators are subject to towing and fines. 1.11 A. TEMPORARY CONTROLS Site Dust Control: 1. 2. B. Security: 1. 2. C. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and existing premises from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Conduct operations in manner to avoid risk of loss, theft or damage by vandalism. Noise Control: 1. 2. 3. 1.12 Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. Execute Work as quietly as practicable to avoid unnecessary disturbances to occupants within premises. High-level noise operations must be performed in accordance with local regulations and must be approved by University prior to proceeding. Loud noise and vibrations, which cause disturbance in hospital and/or laboratory areas, must be controlled and coordinated in advance with the University. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work in manner to prevent damage from construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual Specifications section. C. Provide temporary and removable materials for protection of installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. D. Protect finished Work from damage, defacements, stains, scratches and wear. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01500 - 4 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from weatherproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic on lawn and landscaped areas. 1.13 TEMPORARY INSTALLATION A. Install, maintain, and operate temporary utilities and services to ensure continuous operation. Modify and extend systems as Work progresses. B. Install temporary facilities and controls in manner to produce reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for required purposes, and properly maintained. C. Modify and relocate temporary facilities and controls as necessary to accommodate progress of Work. 1.14 CLEANING, REMOVAL AND RESTORATION A. Maintain construction site in a clean and orderly manner. Provide for routine removal of trash and construction debris. Provide appropriate waste receptacles and containers on site. Remove all containers prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove all temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, controls, and materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection. C. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities and equipment used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities and equipment used during construction to specified condition. 1.15 A. UTILITY INTERRUPTIONS Existing Utility Interruptions at Renovation Work: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. B. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. Related Section: Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition". PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECITON HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01500 - 5 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01500 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01502 DUST CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Construction activities causing disturbance of existing dust, or creating new dust, must be conducted in tight enclosures cutting off any flow of dust particles into adjacent occupied areas. B. Before any construction on site begins, properly brief all workers on site to ensure full compliance with the dust control measures in the construction documents. Conduct a field review of all dust control policies. Fill out and sign a checklist, approved by the CAM. C. Install temporary construction dust control barriers and closures above ceilings to prevent the transmission of dust into adjacent occupied areas. D. Do not allow dust and debris to accumulate. Remove dust daily. Transport all demolished or removed material in tightly sealed, covered rubber tired containers. Fit out containers with clean polyethylene covers. Seal completely at perimeters. Before leaving construction areas wipe clean all containers with a damp sponge to prevent tracking of dust. Place the sponge and pail inside the dust control barrier entrance and keep them clean and changed daily. E. Provide temporary fans, associated ductwork, and dust control barriers required to maintain a negative pressure in the work area relative to the surrounding occupied areas. Provide HEPA filtered exhaust fans when utilizing existing exhaust duct system. Submit plan for achieving negative pressure to the CAM for review. Install a visual monitoring system to demonstrate that the area is under negative pressure at all times until construction barriers are removed. F. Provide walk off mats at inside dust control barrier entrances. Vacuum or change walk-off mats daily or more often as necessary to prevent accumulation of dust. Additionally, provide (sticky) walk-off mat immediately outside dust control barrier entrances. G. Immediately remove any dust tracked outside a dust control barrier. H. Immediately replace any ceiling access panels opened for investigation beyond the sealed areas when unattended. If the ceiling tile is removed from any inpatient area, outpatient transplant clinic or outpatient cancer clinic, then patients must be removed from the space for at least one hour after the ceiling tile is replaced. I. Block off existing ventilation ducts within the construction area. Cap ducts to be dust tight and to withstand airflow and pressure. J. Carefully remove dust control barriers and ceiling protection to minimize the spread of dirt and debris. Obtain approval of University's CAM before proceeding with removal of dust control barriers and ceiling protection. Clean the renovated area before removal of barriers by: a) wet mop all vinyl or sheet flooring, b) vacuum all carpet or soft surfaces with a HEPA filtered vacuum, c) wipe all surfaces with disinfectant HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01502 - 1 DUST CONTROL K. Take immediate action to clean deficient areas. deficiencies are corrected. Cease other construction work until PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL BARRIERS A. Provide temporary dust control barriers where indicated and where reasonably required to ensure protection from dust. (FOR CLASS V ONLY- Dust control barriers shall be full height, non-combustible construction, with a minimum 1/2" gypsum board on one side.) (FOR CLASS IV ONLY- Install plastic dust barriers to seal work area from non-work areas, or implement control cube method (cart with plastic covering and sealed connection to work site with HEPA vacuum). Use 3-inch wide duct tape to tightly seal the perimeter of both sides of the barriers. Install tape in a neat and continuous manner. Finish paint outer surface of each barrier. Match door and frame finish to existing adjacent areas. 1. 2. 3. Dust control barrier doors: 3'-0" minimum width, with frame, hardware, lock set keyed to University system, and heavy duty closer. Tightly weather-strip door to prevent flow of dust into patient areas. Locate doors as directed and swing into construction areas. Keep barrier doors locked outside of working hours. Precut all material for barriers in unoccupied areas. Dust control barriers may not reduce exit access corridors below the required width of 44 inches. (CLASS V ONLY) Seal all door openings to adjacent areas with duct tape. B. Provide rigid non-combustible foil faced insulation board barriers, Certaineed WP225, Owens Corning, or equivalent, to seal patient areas from work areas, at the perimeter of work areas, and between finish ceiling and upper concrete slab. Cut to fit around all existing utilities. Seal with tape or foam around penetrations. (Note- dust barriers may also be constructed as temporary fire/ smoke barriers. As such the gypsum board should continue to the floor slab above. See drawings for appropriate wall type. C. Schedule with the CAM work described in the construction documents outside the construction dust control barriers, including work in corridors and lobbies. D. Do not store any construction equipment or material outside the construction dust control barrier without the University's written permission. E. Keep dust control barriers in a neat clean and dust tight condition at all times. Provide necessary manpower and equipment (dust and wet mops, brooms, buckets and clean wiping rags, HEPA Vacuums) for cleaning fine dust from floors in occupied areas and to keep adjacent occupied areas clean at all times. F. Provide dust tight polyethylene covering taped in place to completely seal opening until final patching is done, whenever openings are made into walls or ceilings in-patient occupied areas. This procedure may only be done if work is completed in one shift. G. Keep construction areas swept clean with sweeping compound and keep clear of debris daily throughout the course of construction. H. Complete and place into operation all of the above described items of work before beginning demolition. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01502 - 2 DUST CONTROL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Maintain and operate dust control systems to provide continuous protection to occupied areas of the hospital. B. Modify and extend systems as required. C. Removal and reconditioning: 1. 2. 3.2 Remove all temporary services installed as a requirement of the Contract Documents. Restore utilities to original condition at the completion of the Work. Legally and properly dispose of all debris resulting from the removal and reconditioning operations. ENFORCEMENT A. If violations and/or non-compliance occur, the University has the right to halt all construction until deficiencies are corrected. The CM/GC will bear full responsibility for any delay of work. B. A record of each dust control violation will be maintained by the CAM. C. Failure of the CM/GC to immediately mitigate and promptly correct deficiencies is sufficient grounds for termination and will result in corrective action being taken by the University. All resulting costs will be the responsibility of the CM/GC. D. Continued violations will be cause to find the CM/GC in non-compliance with contract documents and shall be sufficient grounds for termination END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01502 - 3 DUST CONTROL HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01502 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirement for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of Contract are included in another Division 01 Section “Product Substitution Procedures”. C. Procedures for receiving and installing products furnished by University are included in another Division 01 Section ”University Furnished Products”. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. 1.3 CM/GC shall comply with environmental laws controlling hazardous substances. DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,” “equipment,” “system,” and terms of similar intent. 1. 2. 3. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Products: Items that are demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, and equipment from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by CM/GC. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product Substitution Procedures”. C. Basis-of-Design Product Standard Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "Product Standard," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, inservice performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to University. E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for University. F. Hazardous Substances Prohibited by Law: Including, but not limited to, any product, material, element, constituent, chemical, substance, compound, or mixture, which is defined in, included under, or regulated by any environmental laws. G. Environmental Laws: Applicable local, state, and federal laws, rules, ordinances, codes, regulations, and requirements in effect at the time CM/GC’s services are rendered, any amendments for CM/GC’s services rendered after the effective date of any such amendments, including, without limitation, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1.4 The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. The Toxic Substances Control Act. The Clean Water Act. The Clean Air Act. The Marine Protection Research and Sanctuaries Act. The Occupational Safety and Health Act. The Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986. The Environmental Protection Agency. Other state superlien or environmental clean-up or disclosure statutes including all state and local counterparts of such. SUBMITTALS A. 1.5 CM/GC shall submit an affidavit on construction company letterhead signed by an officer of the company, notarized by a notary public, which certifies compliance with the environmental laws controlling hazardous substances for the construction of this Project. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If CM/GC is given option of selecting between two or more products or materials for use on Project, product or material selected shall be compatible with products or materials previously selected, even if previously selected products or materials were also options. B. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to the Architect. 1. C. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. Compliance: CM/GC shall take whatever measures deemed necessary to insure that all employees, suppliers, vendors, fabricators, subcontractors, or their assigns, to comply with hazardous substance requirements. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.7 Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products and materials to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store products in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage. PRODUCT AND MATERIAL WARRANTIES A. General: Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve CM/GC of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in each Section shall not deprive University of other rights University may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CM/GC under requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. 2. D. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. University reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. Products and materials brought onto the Project Site, and products and materials incorporated into the Work, shall comply with environmental laws. B. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product, material or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. C. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product or material is specified for a specific application. 1. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. D. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with imposed code, standard or regulation, select product that complies with standards, codes or regulations specified. E. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. 1. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS F. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. 1. 2. 3. 2.2 Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. Custom Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "custom range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. Special Custom Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “special custom range of colors patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Architect will select a new color, pattern, or texture different from those normally produced by the manufacturer. PRODUCT OPTIONS A. For products proprietarily specified by a "Named Manufacturer" and model name or number, this is to establish standard of quality. Other manufacturers listed as "Acceptable Manufacturers" have been listed because they have implied compliance with requirements of the "Named Manufacturer". Listed "Acceptable Manufacturers" are not considered "Substitutions", and therefore, are not required to be submitted as such. However, costs, including professional service fees for changes or modifications to adjacent, contiguous, surrounding, supporting, or otherwise related areas, portions or parts of Project which are required to accommodate products and materials of "Acceptable Manufacturers", for complete, proper and functional installation, in lieu of specified "Named Manufacturer", shall be borne or paid by CM/GC. B. For products specified by naming several "Acceptable Manufacturers", select one of products, or manufacturers named, which complies with Contract Documents. Requests for manufacturer's products not listed must be submitted as Substitutions. C. For products specified by naming only one product, or manufacturer, CM/GC must submit request as for substitutions for product, or manufacturer not specifically named. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer and indicated as "no substitute", there is no option. E. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. B. Inspect products immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS C. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. D. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. E. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. F. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible product or material as necessary to prevent deterioration. G. Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. H. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products and materials in accord with manufacturer's instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. 2. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with manufacturer for further instructions. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. I. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. J. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.2 RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES A. CM/GC agrees that it shall not knowingly after reasonable diligence and effort, incorporate into the Work any hazardous substance other than as may be lawfully contained within products, except in accordance with applicable environmental laws. Further, in performing any of its obligations hereunder, CM/GC shall not cause any release of hazardous substances into, or contamination of, the environment, including soil, the atmosphere, any watercourse or ground water, except in accordance with applicable environmental laws. In the event that CM/GC engages in any of the activities prohibited in this paragraph, to the fullest extent permitted by law, CM/GC hereby indemnifies and holds harmless University and its partners, members, officers, directors, agents, employees and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, causes of action, suits and liabilities of every kind, including, but not limited to, expenses of litigation, court costs, punitive damages and attorney’s fees, arising out of, incidental to or resulting from the activities prohibited. B. In the event CM/GC observes on the Project Site any substance which CM/GC reasonably believes to be a hazardous substance, and which is being introduced into the Work, or exists on the Project Site, in a manner violative of any applicable environmental laws, CM/GC shall immediately notify University and report the condition to University in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written authorization of University if in fact a hazardous substance has been encountered and has not been rendered harmless. In the event that CM/GC fails to give University proper notification hereunder, upon knowingly observing a hazardous substance at the Project Site, to the fullest extent permitted by the law, CM/GC hereby indemnifies and holds harmless University, and all of its partners, members, HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 6 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS officers, directors, agents, employees and consultants from and against all claims, damages, losses, causes of action, suits and liabilities of every kind, including, but not limited to, expenses of litigation, court costs, punitive damages and attorneys’ fees, arising out of, incidental to, or resulting from CM/GC’s failure to stop the Work. C. 3.3 If University believes that hazardous substances may have been located, generated, manufactured, used or disposed of on or about the Project Site by CM/GC or any of its employees, agents, subcontractors, suppliers, or invitees, University may have environmental studies of the Project Site conducted as it deems appropriate, and CM/GC shall be responsible for the cost of such studies to the extent that CM/GC or any of its employees, agents, subcontractors, suppliers or invitees are responsible for the presence of any hazardous substances. CASEWORK A. The CM/GC shall procure all project casework from the University purchasing department’s preselected casework manufacturers listed at: 1. http://www.procurement.virginia.edu/pagepacontracts&q=casework&sort=category END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 7 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01600 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES (See General Conditions §26 in either the HECO-7/CO-7, HECO-7CM, or HECO-7DB/CO-7DB as applicable.) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A. 1.2 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of Contract. DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by CM/GC after award of Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." Following are not considered substitutions: 1. 2. 3. 1.3 Revisions to Contract Documents requested by University or Architect. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. CM/GC's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. SUBMITTALS A. Submit three copies of each request for product substitution complete with properly executed form and all supporting data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bids shall be based upon providing specified materials, products, Acceptable Manufacturers, organizations, and applications; identified in these Specifications or indicated on Drawings. B. CM/GC's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for construction activities not complying with Contract Documents does not constitute acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. C. CM/GC's substitution request will be received and considered by Architect when one or more of following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. 2. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. Proposed changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01630 - 1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within Contract Time. Request will not be considered if product or method cannot be provided as result of failure to pursue Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. Specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by governing authority, and requested substitution can be approved. Substantial advantage is offered University, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities University must assume. Additional responsibilities for University may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by University, and similar considerations. Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in manner that is compatible with other materials, and where CM/GC certifies that substitution will overcome incompatibility. Specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where CM/GC certifies that proposed substitution can be coordinated. Specified product or method of construction cannot provide warranty required by Contract Documents and where CM/GC certifies that proposed substitution provide required warranty. D. Due to limited time available during bidding period, request for substitutions will not be evaluated by Architect until after “Notice to Proceed”. For period of sixty (60) consecutive calendar days after “Notice to Proceed”, substitutions will be considered by Architect. Requests for substitution after that time will be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. E. Burden of proof of equality rests with CM/GC. F. Submit separate request for each Product Substitution, on Architect's standard form "HKS Substitution Request Form 01630", copy at end of this section, supported with complete data, technical literature, drawings and samples as appropriate, including: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. G. By making request for substitution, CM/GC: 1. 2. 3. 4. H. Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with that specified. (Submit data for both products) Changes required in other elements of work because of substitution. Effect on construction schedule. Cost data comparing proposed substitution with Product specified. Required license fees or royalties. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials. List of appropriate installations. Represents and warrants that CM/GC has personally investigated proposed substitution product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified; Represents and warrants that CM/GC will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution That CM/GC would for that specified. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except for Architect's redesign cost, and waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which may subsequently become apparent; and Will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such other changes as may be required to make Work complete in all respects. Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify CM/GC, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01630 - 2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES I. University and Architect reserve right to accept or reject proposed substitutions. Each request shall state amount of savings to University, if substitution is accepted. Acceptance of proposed substitution does not constitute approval or inclusion in Architect's and Consultant's Documents. Pay applications certification, change orders, and certificate of substantial completion will contain such qualification. J. Cost of testing required for analysis of proposed substitution shall be paid for by CM/GC at testing agency selected and approved by Architect. K. Should substitution be accepted, CM/GC shall be responsible to make necessary adjustments in Work which may be affected as result of substitution at no additional cost. L. CM/GC warrants that substituted material or system will perform same as original specified material or system would have performed. Should accepted substitution fail to perform as required, CM/GC shall replace substitute material or system with that specified and bear costs incurred thereby. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01630 - 3 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01630 - 4 Substitution Request Form 01630 To HKS Contract Manager HKS Project No. 16567.004 Project Name UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE Specified Item Section Page Paragraph Description The undersigned General Contractor requests consideration of the following: Proposed Substitution (Include all product data as indicated in Specification Section 01630 and any supplemental information as requested by the Architect.) The undersigned General Contractor warrants to the Architect and Owner that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct. 1. The Proposed Substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The cost reduction/increase indicated in item 5 below includes costs for changes to the building design, including engineering, design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested Substitution. Any additional costs resulting from this substitution will be reimbursed from the cost savings in item 5 or, in it’s absence, funded as a project cost. 3. The Proposed Substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the Proposed Substitution. The General Contractor further warrants to the Architect and Owner that the function and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. The General Contractor further warrants that specification section 01630, paragraph 2.1G intent has been met. 5. Total Cost Savings/Increase to the Owner: $ Manufacturer’s Certification of Equal Quality I represent the manufacturer of the Proposed Substitution item and hereby certify and warrant to the Architect and Owner that the function and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. Manufacturer’s Representative Date Company General Contractor Acceptance Date Company Owner Acceptance Date Company Architect Acceptance Date Company Acceptances 1. 2. 3. Recommend Acceptance: Yes No ©HKS-01630-2009 HKS ARCHITECTS, INC. 2100 EAST CARY STREET, SUITE 100 RICHMOND, VA 23223 804.644.8400 FAX 804.644.8469 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01640 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes work required to relocate and install University furnished products indicated by Contract Documents and furnish supplementary items necessary for their proper installation. SUBMITTALS A. Obtain following from University or University’s product manufacturer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.3 Shop drawings for product requirements. Installation drawings for items requiring coordination with work of other Sections. Actual layout of installations pertinent to this Work. Rough-in requirements. QUALIFICATIONS A. Installation of University furnished products shall be by skilled experienced and qualified mechanics of the appropriate trade for the work involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED, UNIVERSITY INSTALLED PRODUCT A. The specific product is not in this contract, and actual installation of the product will be made by the University. B. Products will be indicated as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 2.2 Product prefixed with "Space for". N.I.C. University Furnished - University Installed. Product noted as "Future". Roughing-in for University Furnished, University Installed Product is provided by applicable Sections governing the type of work. Obtain rough-in requirements from University. UNIVERSITY FURNISHED, CM/GC INSTALLED PRODUCT A. Install products indicated as follows: 1. 2. 3. University Furnished, CM/GC Installed". “Reuse”. “Relocate.” HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01640 - 1 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS B. Provide labor, transportation, materials, tools, appliances and utilities necessary for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Removing installed product from the University's existing facility, as required. Transportation of product from University's facility to the job site. Receiving and storage of University furnished, CM/GC installed product, as required. Providing materials and components for the product as necessary to install in an operating condition, but not including repairing of existing damages to the product. Modification of product only as specified under the particular item. Installation of product in this project, complete and in operating condition, including the adjusting and calibration of the product as necessary for proper operation. Testing of product. Paying of fees, licenses, and taxes in conjunction with the installation of the product. Roughing-in and final utility connections for the University furnished, CM/GC installed product remains the work of Sections governing the specific utility. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other Sections to obtain proper installation of items. Become acquainted with the work of other Sections whose work abuts, adjoins or is in any way affected by or related to work under this Section. B. Carefully examine the drawings and directions and be responsible for proper installation of materials and product without substantial changes. C. Indication of pipe connection sizes on the plans shall in no way relieve CM/GC of the responsibility of checking and verifying their sizes and locations from the actual product to be installed and any available roughing-in diagrams. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Locations: The general arrangement of the University Furnished Product is indicated on the drawings. B. Roughing-in: When product is not available prior to the installation schedule, rough-in the utility service at walls or floors as directed, and leave ready for future connection. C. Installations: Install product and material in conformance with manufacturer's directions where available. Work shall be assembled and installed in harmony with other trades at such times and in such sequence as acceptable to the University. 3.3 PROTECTION TO PRODUCT AND MATERIALS A. Utilities: Close pipe openings with caps or plugs, and protect electrical work as necessary. B. Product: Tightly cover and protect product against dirt, water and mechanical or chemical injury. C. Damage to University's property due to fault or negligence of the CM/GC shall be repaired or replaced at no additional expense to the University. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01640 - 2 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS 3.4 REMOVING PRODUCT FROM EXISTING FACILITY A. Schedule for removal of product from existing facility shall be coordinated with University's requirements. B. Minimize shut down of existing building operations. C. No utilities may be turned off without the University's approval. D. Take necessary precaution to protect building and occupants from injury due to work of this Section. E. Cover and insulate exposed wires to removed product. F. Adequately cover floor openings and flag projections as necessary. 3.5 SCHEDULE OF UNIVERSITY FURNISHED, CM/GC INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Refer to Drawings. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01640 - 3 UNIVERSITY FURNISHED PRODUCTS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01640 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. 2. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Refer to Division 1 Section “Project Communications”. D. Installation: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. a. b. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights recommended by industry standards. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01700 - 1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 6. 7. E. Progress Cleaning: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. Starting and Adjusting: Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 1. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. G. Protection of Installed Construction: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. H. Correction of the Work: Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. 2. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01700 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01710 PROJECT CLARIFICATIONS A. The following clarifications shall be considered a part of the work. B. PROJECT MANUAL 1. C. D. The Project Manual is the volume issued by the Architect which includes the Conditions of the Contract, the Special Conditions the Specifications, and may include Bidding Requirements. CORRELATION AND INTENT 1. Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 2. The Sections included within Division 1 are intended to be extensions to various applicable Articles in the General Conditions. Any conflicts or contradictions between them shall be interpreted that the General Conditions shall prevail. 3. Summary paragraphs placed at the beginning of the Sections present a brief indication of the principal Work included in that Section, but do not limit Work to subject mentioned nor purport to itemize Work that may be included. 4. The Relation of Specifications and Drawings shall be equal authority and priority. Should they disagree in themselves, or with each other, bids shall be based on the most expensive combination of quality and quantity of work indicated. The appropriate Work, in the event of the above mentioned disagreements, shall be determined by the Architect. 5. Should the Drawings disagree themselves, figures shall govern over scaled measurements, large scaled Drawings shall govern over small scale Drawings, the greater quantity of work or materials shall be furnished and performed; the descriptive writings shall govern over legends indicating material or conditions and the Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 6. Failure to report a conflict in the Contract Documents shall be deemed evidence that the CM/GC has elected to proceed in the more expensive manner. 7. Instructions, directions and requirements as specified shall be considered to be followed by the phrase "unless otherwise specified or indicated". INTERPRETATION 1. In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01710 - 1 PROJECT CLARIFICATIONS E. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. F. PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION 1. G. H. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 1. If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the CM/GC, the CM/GC shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the University and Architect in writing. 2. The CM/GC shall provide University with an affidavit notarized by a notary public which certifies that no PCB's or asbestos have been used in the materials for construction of the Project. This affidavit shall be due at the same time the Release of Lien on products is furnished to the Architect. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPONENTS (VOC) 1. I. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. The CM/GC shall provide University with an affidavit notarized by a notary public which certifies that all materials containing Volatile Organic Components (VOC) are in strict compliance with all VOC (Volatile Organic Components) requirements and regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA), State, County, City and Local Air Control District. HAZARDOUS WASTE 1. The CM/GC shall provide University with an affidavit notarized by a notary public which certifies that all hazardous waste, trash, debris, etc. have been disposed of in a manner which is in strict compliance with all current requirements of EPA (Environmental Protection Agency), State, County, City and Local districts or authorities. END OF DOCUMENT HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01710 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL A. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1. C. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. 2. B. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01731 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING C. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. E. Performance: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. F. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. 2. 3. 4. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01731 - 2 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. B. Substantial Completion Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify CM/GC of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify CM/GC of items, either on CM/GC's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. 2. C. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. Advise University of pending insurance changeover requirements. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Obtain and submit releases permitting University unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by University. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Complete startup testing of systems. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Advise University of changeover in heat and other utilities. Submit changeover information related to University's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. 2. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01770 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 3. 4. 5. D. Final Completion Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify CM/GC of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify CM/GC of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. E. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. Instruct University's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. List of Incomplete Items (Punch List): Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by CM/GC that are outside the limits of construction. 1. 2. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. F. Project Record Documents: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. G. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of reproducible Contract Drawings and one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Drawings to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. 2. 3. H. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. 2. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01770 - 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES I. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. J. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. Provide 3 copies to the University Warranties: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. 1. 2. 3. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280mm) paper. WARRANTIES: (FDG GR.11.7) Warranties shall be written in the name of “Commonwealth of Virginia and the Rector and Board of Visitors of the University of Virginia.” Specify requirement that two copies of each warranty are required in the specified format. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Demonstration and Training: Instruct University's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. Schedule training with University, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01770 - 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES B. Final Cleaning: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. 1. 2. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. C. Remove construction equipment and surplus material from Project site. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken transparent materials. Remove labels that are not permanent. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Wipe surfaces of mechanical, electrical and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication and foreign substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors. Replace burned-out bulbs and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on University's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 01770 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL A. Definitions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner’s designated storage area. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. B. Materials Ownership: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. C. Submittals: 1. 2. 3. Proposed dust-control and noise-control measures. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition work, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. Pre-demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with applicable regulations, codes and ordinances. E. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. F. Project Conditions: 1. 2. 3. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. a. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 02 4119 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION G. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. H. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. I. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Repair Materials: Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. 2. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. Use materials whose installed performance equal or surpasses that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. C. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. D. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. E. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, shut off, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. F. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to facilities to remain. G. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. H. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 02 4119 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION I. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. J. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. K. Selective Demolition: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, verify condition and contents before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. L. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. M. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. N. Patching and Repairs: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. 1. O. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. Disposal of Demolished Materials: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 1. 2. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 02 4119 - 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 02 4119 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes through penetration firestopping systems for openings and penetrations through smoke and fire-resistance-rated assemblies, and supplementary items necessary to complete their installation. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestopping systems with F-ratings determined per ASTM E 814, equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestopping systems with T-ratings, as well as F-ratings, determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. 1.3 Penetrations located outside wall cavities. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall crosssectional area. For through-penetration firestopping systems exposed to view, provide products with flamespread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestopping design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. 2. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for construction and penetrating items. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8413 - 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING marked, approved by firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of firestopping system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating firestopping system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed firestopping systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestopping systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition required, from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. 2. D. 1.5 Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestopping systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Through-penetration firestopping systems: Provide materials that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated firestopping system products that bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestopping systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturer is “acceptable” if firestopping system has been tested and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8413 - 2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING jurisdiction and manufacturer can evidence product compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Compatibility: Provide firestopping systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating firestopping systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components specified by firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping systems indicated. 2.2 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Description: Classified in Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, "Section XHEZ - Through Penetration Firestop Systems", and/or "Section XHHW - Fill Void or Cavity Materials" for specific project conditions. B. Application Considerations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Firestops exposed to view and/or are scheduled to receive finishes shall be paintable or capable of receiving finish materials. Firestops exposed to traffic, moisture, and physical damage shall be products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. Firestops for water piping penetrations, of any type, shall be moisture-resistant products. Firestops for floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic shall be products capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. Firestops for penetrations involving insulated piping shall be products that do not require removal of insulation. a. Firestops for cable trays and future penetrations shall be reusable pillows or bags. C. Provide firestops within fire resistive walls and partitions containing flush mounted devices such as outlet boxes, electrical cabinets and mechanical cabinets mounted back to back and spaced less than 24 inches on center in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory “Wall Opening Protective Materials”, Category CLIV. D. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive firestopping systems and associated work and conditions under which work will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting of work within a particular area will be construed as installers acceptance of surface conditions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8413 - 3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of openings, joints and penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. 2. 3. 3.4 Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping system products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping system components during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8413 - 4 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8413 - 5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8413 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 07 8446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes firestopping systems for joints at perimeter and through smoke and fireresistance-rated assemblies, and supplementary items necessary to complete their installation. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which firestopping systems are installed. B. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide systems for sealing linear joints in fire resistive rated assemblies that has ratings with movement capabilities equaling or exceeding the fire resistance rating of construction which joint occurs, as determined by UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966. C. Expansion and Contraction: Perimeter fire containment systems shall accommodate movement of the exterior wall due to thermal expansion and contraction. D. For firestopping systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of firestopping system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each firestopping system, show each kind of construction condition and relationships to adjoining construction. Include firestopping design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. 2. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each firestopping system configuration for each type construction. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of firestopping system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating firestopping system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8446 - 1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed firestopping systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain firestopping systems, for each kind of construction condition required, from a single manufacturer. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Manufacturer of fire stopping material shall be responsible for testing samples of materials that will contact or affect firestopping materials. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of fill materials to joint substrates. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. For materials failing tests, obtain fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. 2. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestopping systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire Resistive Joint System: Provide materials that are identical to those tested according to UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966. Products shall have a flame spread rating of less than 25. a. 1.5 Where UL-classified fire-resistive joint systems are indicated, they refer to alphanumeric designations listed in UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” under product Category XHBN. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings to ensure that firestopping systems are installed according to specified requirements. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8446 - 2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturer is “acceptable” if firestopping system has been tested and listed by UL or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer can evidence product compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Compatibility: Provide firestopping systems that are compatible with one another and the substrates forming openings, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components specified by firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping systems indicated. 2.2 TOP-OF-WALL JOINT FIRESTOPPING A. Safing Insulation: Semi rigid board insulation produced by combining slag-wool fibers with thermosetting resin binders and complying with the following: 1. 2. 3. ASTM C 612, Type 1A and 1B. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. ASTM E119 Fire rating indicated, but not less than 2 hours. B. Coating Material: Manufacturers standard fill material or spray applied product for sealing surface of safing insulation and adjacent construction against penetration of fire and smoke. C. Fire Resistive Sealants: Intumescent single-component, water based, high solids, elastomeric sealants. Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Examine substrate surfaces to receive firestopping systems and associated work and conditions under which work will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Starting of work within a particular area will be construed as installers acceptance of surface conditions. PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of joints that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8446 - 3 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING 2. 3. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install fire-stopping systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and firestopping system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. 2. 3. 3.4 Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. INSTALLATION OF FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begin. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8446 - 4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FIRE SAFING PROTECTION A. Top of Wall: Install safing insulation to fill gap between top of wall and floor slab above. Cut safing insulation 50 percent wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit. B. Install coating material or smoke seal compound to cover fill material and seal opening. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping system products and of products in which joints occur. B. Protect firestopping system components during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8446 - 5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT FIRESTOPPING HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 8446 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Joint sealants, backing materials, and supplementary items necessary for installation. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Samples for each kind and color of joint sealants in 1/2 in (12 mm) wide joints formed between two 6 in (150 mm) long strips of material matching appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. 1.3 For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive Submittal of Qualification Data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.4 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.5 Ambient Conditions: Install joint sealants within range of ambient and substrate temperatures and moisture conditions as recommended by manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. 2.2 Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Compatibility: Joint sealants, backings, and other related materials shall be compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and primers for use inside weatherproofing system shall comply with following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3. 2.3 Elastomeric Sealants: 250 g/L. Primers for Non-Porous Substrates: 250 g/L. Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. INTERIOR ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Interior Non-sag Silicone Sealant: 1. 2. 3. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, silicone sealant specially formulated with fungicide for use in sanitary non-porous applications. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. e. 4. B. BASF; Omniplus. Dow Corning; 786 Silicone Sealant. Momentive Performance Materials, GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. Pecora Corp.; 898. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremsil 200. Color: Refer to the drawings. Interior Non-sag Urethane Sealant: 1. 2. 3. 4. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25 or 35. Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, non-staining as determined by preconstruction stain testing if exposed, polyurethane sealant. Joint Movement Capability: Plus 25 percent, minus 25 percent, or plus 35 percent, minus 35 percent. Primers: Product provided by sealant manufacturer if required by conditions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 9200 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. 6. C. Color: Refer to the drawings. Interior Non-sag Acrylic Latex Sealant: 1. 2. 3. 4. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 834, Type and Grade as required by conditions. Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, general purpose, paintable, siliconized acrylic latex sealant. Joint Movement Capability: Plus 7.5 percent, minus 7.5 percent Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. 5. D. BASF; Sonolastic NP 1. Pecora Corp.; Dynatrol I-XL. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Dymonic or Vulkem 116. BASF; Sonolac. Pecora Corp.; AC 20+. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremflex 834. Color: Refer to the drawings. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler: 1. 2. 3. Description: Low pressure, one-component, expanding, closed-cell polyurethane insulating foam gap filler; applied with professional hand-held dispensing gun; CFC and HCFC free. Performance Requirements: Class 1 Fire-Retardant per ASTM E 84. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. Convenience Products; Touch ‘n Seal. Dow Chemical Co.; Great Stuff Pro. Fomo Products, Inc.; Handi-Foam. RHH Foam Systems, Inc.; Versi-Tite E. Acoustical Sealants: As specified in Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”. F. Fire Resistive Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section “Fire Resistive Joint Firestopping”. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Foam Backer Rods: 1. 2. 3. B. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 1330, Type C, Type O, Type B. Description: Extruded polyethylene, polyurethane, or polyolefin in either closed cell structure (Type C), open cell structure (Type O), or bicellular structure with surface skin (Type B) as defined by ASTM Terminology C 717. Size: Diameter approximately 25 percent larger than joint width, unless otherwise directed by manufacturer. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials, or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 9200 - 3 JOINT SEALANTS 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaners for Non-porous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. B. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrate surfaces to receive products and systems and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 3.3 Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint backings and sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove foreign material that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including, but not limited to, dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean non-porous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Substrate material allowed by sealant’s ASTM C 920 Use Classification. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 9200 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer, or as indicated by prior experience, or as required by pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Joint Sealant Backings: Install type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet or damaged before sealant application and replace with dry materials. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. Joint Sealants: Install at same time as backings using proven techniques that comply with following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Use open cell backer rod at interior line of sealant for double sealed condition. Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. a. b. c. 6. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 as applicable to materials, applications, conditions indicated, and with the following profile configurations: a. b. c. Fillet: Figure 5. Bridge: Figure 6. Butt: Figure 8A (concave tooling), generally hour-glass shape with 2:1 width-to-depth ratio. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 9200 - 5 JOINT SEALANTS C. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler: Apply sprayed foam insulating gap filler within exterior wall assemblies using professional hand-held dispensing gun in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. 2. 3.5 Prior to installation of wall finish systems, apply sprayed foam insulating gap filler to gaps, cracks, cavities, openings, and voids in exterior wall back-up, including annular space around piping, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets to seal off potential air drafts. After sprayed foam sealant is applied, make flush with face of adjacent wall by using method recommended by manufacturer. CLEANING A. 3.6 In-Progress Cleaning: Remove excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION A. 3.7 General Requirements: Protect during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original Work. JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Interior Elastomeric Sealant Applications: 1. Interior Non-sag Silicone Sealant: a. 2. Interior Non-sag Urethane Sealant: a. 3. Building joints on interior side of exterior walls where joint movement is anticipated. Interior Non-sag Acrylic Latex Sealant: a. b. B. Non-moving joints in moist or damp areas which are susceptible to mildew. Non-moving joints where another type of sealant is not otherwise specified or scheduled. Minimal moving joints due to temperature change. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler Applications: 1. Interior non-moving gaps around windows, glazed aluminum walls, doors, and penetrations. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 07 9200 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 08 1114 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Interior custom hollow metal frames and supplementary items necessary for installation. DEFINITIONS A. Custom Hollow Metal Work: HMMA 861. B. Interior: Areas located in conditioned spaces. 1.3 Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM- SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm) samples to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: 1. Frames: Show profile, head-to-jamb corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable. D. Frame Schedule: Schedule prepared by or under supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door and hardware schedules. E. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 1 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.5 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 in (100 mm) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.7 Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. 2.2 Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 2 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES B. Fire-Rated Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. D. Smoke-Control Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with UL 1784. 2.3 COMPONENT MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, Designation CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591 / A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Device type and size required, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153 / A 153M, Class B. D. Fasteners into Concrete: 1. 2. E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosionresistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching frames into concrete substrate. Post-Tensioned Concrete: For post-tensioned concrete, fasteners shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm) embedment. Obtain Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed fasteners in post-tensioned concrete prior to installation. Mineral-Fiber Insulation for Installations in Sound-Rated Partitions: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 lb/cu ft (96 to 192 kg/cu m) density; with following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 maximum. Smoke Development Index: 50 maximum. Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136. F. Glazing: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing". G. Primer: Fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting, lead and chromate free, universal primer complying with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabrication Quality Standard: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. B. General Requirements: Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit, and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 3 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES C. Accessories: Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from cold-rolled steel sheet. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.5 Locate hardware according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. Reinforce frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Fabrication Provisions: 1. 2. Fabricate frames of construction indicated below. Close contact edges of corner joints tight with faces mitered and full-profile continuously welded. a. 3. 4. B. Close contact edges of stops butted or mitered. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. Joinery: 1. Fabrication Quality Standard: Head-to-jamb joints according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 820 for either of following fabrication techniques with: a. b. 2. 3. 4. C. “Knock-down” frame construction is not acceptable and shall not be used. Saw-mitered corners, full-profile continuously welded. Machine-mitered corners, full-profile continuously welded. Externally or internally weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and seamless. Internally weld rabbet and soffits continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth. Use of gusset or splice plates as substitute for fully welding is not permitted. Materials and Thickness: 1. Frames for Interior Openings: thicknesses: a. b. 2. Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet of following 48 in (1200 mm) Wide or Less: 0.053 in (1.3 mm) (16 gage) thick. More Than 48 in (1200 mm) Wide: 0.067 in (1.7 mm) (14 gage) thick. Sidelight and Transom Frames: Closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints fabricated from same type and thickness of material as adjacent door frame. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 4 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 3. D. Interior Borrowed-Light Frames: Fabricated from 0.053 in (1.3 mm) (16 gage) thick coldrolled steel sheet. Stops and Moldings: 1. 2. Form corners with butted or mitered hairline joints. Provide around glazed lites where indicated. a. b. 3. E. Fixed frame moldings on secure side of interior doors and frames. Loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work so that glass can be removed independently. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as frame. Minimum thickness of steel reinforcing plates for following hardware: 1. 2. 3. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 in (4.2 mm) (7 gage) thick by 1-1/2 in wide by 6 in (38 mm by 150 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage). Surface-Mounted Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage). F. Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage) thick, steel channel or angle stiffener for opening widths more than 48 in (1200 mm). G. Jamb Anchors: 1. Types: Fabricated of same material as frame: a. b. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 in (1.10 mm) (18 gage) thick. Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Countersunk, flat or oval head exposed screws and bolts with expansion shields or inserts, minimum 3/8 in (10 mm) diameter bolts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. Quantity and Location: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 in (450 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 in (800 mm) on centers and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 in (1500 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 in (1500 to 2250 mm) high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 in (2250 to 2400 mm) high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 in (600 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 in (2400 mm) high. Two anchors per head for frames above 42 in (1050 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 5 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES b. H. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Locate anchors not more than 6 in (150 mm) from top and bottom of frame and not more than 26 in (650 mm) on centers. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames welded to bottom of jambs and mullions with not less than 4 spot welds, not less than 0.0428 in (1.10 mm) (18 gage) thick, and as follows, terminating bottom of frames at finish floor surface: 1. 2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 in (50 mm) height adjustment. I. Shipping Spreader Bars: Attach two removable metal spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. J. Door Silencers: Drill holes to receive door silencers furnished under Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. Keep holes clear during construction. 1. 2. 2.6 Single-Door Frames: Strike jamb for 3 door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Head jamb for 2 door silencers. STEEL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for cleaning, treating, priming, and when specified, finishing. B. Finish products specified in this Section after fabrication. C. Non-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning". D. Prime Coat Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. E. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 6 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 3.3 ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 840. NFPA 80 for fire-rated frames. NFPA 105 for smoke control frames. DHI A115.IG. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Pre-Installation Tolerances: Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to following: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 3.4 Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. Hardware Preparation: Drill and tap frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surfacemounted door hardware. INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. 1. Setting: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and welded-in shipping spreader bars. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. a. b. c. d. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 7 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors or powder actuated fasteners. Sound-Rated Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. In-Place Masonry or Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to following: a. b. c. d. B. Glazing: 1. 2. 3.5 Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm), measured at jambs at floor. Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing". Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 6 in (150 mm) on center and not more than 2 in (50 mm) on centers from each corner. ADJUSTMENTS A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective hollow metal work, including work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of primer compatible with paint specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”. C. Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1114 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 08 1416 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Flush wood doors and accessories necessary to complete installation including, but not limited to, following: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Solid-core doors with faces indicated. Factory finishing. Factory fitting to frames and factory machining for hardware. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work. Provide dimensioned drawings indicating location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. Include details of core and edge construction, light frames, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. Include manufacturer’s surface preparation instructions. Indicate scheduled fire doors that cannot qualify for labeling because of design, size, hardware or other reason. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. Indicate requirements for door face matching. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. Indicate fire-protection-ratings for fire-rated doors. Samples for Verification Purposes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Wood Veneer Doors: Wood veneer factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 in by 10 in (200 mm by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of 3 samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished work. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 1 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 in by 10 in (200 mm by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. b. Wood Veneer Doors: Samples for each species of wood veneer and solid lumber required. Finish door facing samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors. D. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. F. Warranty: Sample of warranty. 1. G. 1.3 For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.4 Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3. 1.5 Package doors individually. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Deliver and install doors only when spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 2 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.6 COORDINATION A. 1.7 Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s written material and labor warranty signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to furnish materials and labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits material defects caused by manufacture or design and installation of product. Warranty shall also include finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required. 1. Defects include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. Warping (Bow, Cup, or Twist): Not more than 1/4 in (6 mm) in a 42 by 84 in (1050 by 2100 mm) section. Telegraphing of Core Construction: Not more than 0.01 in in a 3 in (0.25 mm in a 75 mm) span in face veneers. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and labor Defects for a period as follows: a. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.2 Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Eggers Industries. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite Company. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. VT Industries Inc. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: Products and construction identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and included under Category GSZN, Category A, published in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory"; or listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 3 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2. 3. 4. 2.3 Positive Pressure Testing: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 in (1000 mm) or less above sill. Availability: If specified as fire-rated and labeled door can be obtained from one manufacturer, no consideration will be given to those manufacturers who are not authorized to manufacture such doors. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with UL 1784. Installation shall comply with NFPA 105 (per VUSBC Section 715.4.3.1). DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Product Quality Standard: In addition to standard listed elsewhere, comply with following, unless otherwise specified, for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements: 1. Standard: a. b. B. Particleboard Core Doors: 1. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. Blocking: Solid wood blocking as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware and as follows: a. b. c. d. C. Top Rail: 5 in (125 mm). Bottom Rail: 5 in (125 mm). Mid Rail: 5 in (125 mm), in doors indicated to have exit devices. Lock Blocks: 5 in by 10 in (125 mm by 250 mm), one for lock and two for exit devices. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Mineral core as required for fire-protection-rating indicated. 1. 2. D. AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards”. WI’s “Manual of Millwork”. Edge: Construction with intumescent seals; where positive pressure fire testing is required, edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching door face material and laminated backing at hinge stiles for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. Pairs: Fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. Mineral Core Doors: 1. 2. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection-rating indicated. Blocking: Composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection-ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware and as follows: a. b. c. d. Top Rail: 5 in (125 mm). Bottom Rail: 5 in (125 mm). Mid Rail: 5 in (125 mm), in doors indicated to have exit devices. Lock Blocks: 5 in by 10 in (125 mm by 250 mm), one for lock and two for exit devices. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 4 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2.4 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid Core Doors: 1. 2. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA wood veneer faces. Species and Cut Selection: Refer to the drawings. a. b. c. d. 3. 4. 5. 6. Exposed Vertical Edges: AWI 1300-T-7 #5 Edge, same wood veneer as face veneer with sanded eased edges. Horizontal Edges: Unfaced, sanded smooth, then apply seal coat. Core: Particleboard or mineral core as required by application. Construction: 5 plies. a. b. c. 2.5 Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book or Slip match. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance or Center-Balance match Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are separated by not less than 20 ft (6 m) or more. Pair and Set Match: For doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. Stiles and rails bonded to core. Entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces bonded to core using a hot press. LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: 1. 2. 3. B. Wood Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: 1. 2. 3. 2.6 Description: Manufacturer's standard wood beads and profile. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. Material and Finish: Same veneer species and finish as door faces. Glass: As specified in Division 08 Section “Glazing”. Description: Manufacturer's standard wood veneered, noncombustible beads approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire protection rating indicated. Material and Finish: Same veneer species and finish as door faces. Glass: As specified in Division 08 Section “Glazing”. DOOR LOUVERS A. Wood Louvers: 1. 2. Description: Manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers. Material and Finish: Same veneer species and finish as door faces. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 5 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Metal Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: 1. 2. Description: Louver with fusible link and closing device listed and labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less; set in continuous metal frame that covers edge of door cutout. Metal: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 in (1.0 mm) thick, a. b. C. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.7 Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coated factory finish. Color Selection: Match sample accepted by Architect. Air Louvers Inc. Anemostat; a Mestek Company. Hiawatha Incorporated. L & L Louvers, Inc. LL Building Products, Inc.; a Division of GAF Materials Corporation. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a Mestek Company. McGill Architectural Products. FABRICATION OF PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Fabrication Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, comply with following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. NFPA 80 for fire rated doors. DHI-WDHS-3 and DHI A115-W series standards for hardware. AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.” Approved submittals. Contract Documents. Factory Fitting: Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated according to installation quality standards. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits permitted for fire rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining with seal coat. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. b. c. 2. C. Head, Jambs, and Between Pairs of Doors: 1/8 in (3 mm). Bottom to Top of Floor Coverings: 1/2 in (12 mm. Bottom to Top of Raised Threshold: 3/8 in (10 mm). Bevel: 1/8 in in 2 in (3 mm in 50 mm) (3-1/2 deg) at lock and hinge edges; at fire rated doors trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. Hardware: 1. 2. 3. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied according to installation quality standards. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. Provide built-in 1/4 in (6 mm) diameter raceway through doors, from lockset location to nearest hinge location, for low voltage wiring for doors scheduled to have electric locks. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 6 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS D. Transom Panels: Fabricate matching panels of same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. E. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. 2. 3. 2.8 Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing". Louvers: Factory-install louvers in prepared openings. FACTORY FINISHING DOORS A. General: 1. 2. 3. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on edges of cutouts and mortises. B. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. C. Wood Veneer Faced Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Finish: As follows: a. b. Grade: Premium. Product Quality Standard Finish Designation: 1) 2) c. AWI conversion varnish system. WI System 4 clear conversion varnish system. Staining: Refer to the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive flush wood doors and associated work to which flush wood doors will be applied for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. 1. 2. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Reject doors with defects. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 7 PREFINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. NFPA 80 for fire rated doors. NFPA 105 (per VUSBC Section 715.4.3.1) for smoke control doors. AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.” Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Approved submittals. Contract Documents. B. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. C. Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.” D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 1416 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Items commercially known as finish or door hardware required for operation of doors, and accessories necessary to complete installation. B. Products not installed under this Section: Coordinating and scheduling remain requirements of this Section 1. 1.2 Cylinders and cores for all locks are to be furnished and installed by the Owner. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each item of door hardware indicated, specified, or required. 1. 2. B. Including material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and installation instructions. Index product data sheets according to hardware schedule by use of numbers or letters, or combination. Shop Drawings for Electrified Hardware: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Indicate power, signal, and control wiring detailed in following forms distinguishing between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. C. System schematic. Point-to-point wiring diagrams. Riser diagrams. Door elevations. Interface: Details between electrified hardware and fire alarm and security system. Sequence of Operation: Narrative operation description of doors controlled by electrified hardware. Hardware Set Schedules: Prepared by suppliers AHC detailing fabrications and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate hardware sets with doors, frames, and related Work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of item. 1. Format: Use same numbering shown on Drawings and Schedules. a. Content: Organize into hardware sets indicating designations of each item required for each door or opening. Include following information: 1) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each item. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) b. 2. Manufacturer and product number of each item. Fastenings and other pertinent attachment information. Location of each set cross referenced to room name and number in which door serves. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for hardware. Door and frame sizes and materials. Additional Specific Information: Include type of strike plates; length of spindle, hand, backset and bevel of locks; hand and degree opening for closers; length of kickplates; length of rods for flush bolts; type of door stop; and other functions of mechanisms. Keying Schedule: By Owner. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual required by Division 01, submit manufacturer’s instructions for operation and maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. E. Operational and Maintenance Training: Training materials, including instructor qualifications, required by Close-Out Activities Article. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: 1. 2. Experience: Architectural door hardware supplier that has record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project. Staff Hardware Expertise: Experienced professional currently certified by DHI as AHC, CDC, and EHC, and experienced in door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to this Project that will be responsible for following activities: a. b. c. B. Preparation of submittals, including hardware set schedules. Available for consultation to Owner, Architect, and Contractor during course of Work. Finalizing keying requirements with Owner. Installer Qualifications: 1. 2. 3. Experience: Company with experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and sufficient capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. Manufacturer Training: Technical representatives of manufacturer of locksets, exit devices and closers shall train Installer’s installation personnel (supervisor and installers), either at Project or at manufacturers facility, on following: a. Proper installation of products. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE b. c. d. e. Proper sequence of installation of Work. Situations that require special attention or care during installation. Situations and conditions that should be avoided. Other topics relevant to installation. C. Manufacturers Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services department of manufacturer with experience in providing recommendations, observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics. Sales representatives are not acceptable. D. Pre-Installation Conference: Before beginning Work of this Section, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. 1. Required Attendees: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. Owner. Architect. Contractor, including supervisor. Supplier’s architectural hardware consultant. Hardware installer, including supervisor. Owner’s Security installer, including supervisor. Manufacturer’s technical representative. Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of Work required by reviewing and discussing procedures for, but not limited to, following: a. b. c. d. Tour representative areas of required Work, discuss and evaluate for compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of installation and other preparatory Work performed by other installers. Review Contract Document requirements. Review approved submittals. Review installation procedures, including, but not limited to, following: 1) 2) 3) e. f. 3. 1.4 Installation requirements for each hardware item. Sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware Relationships between electrified hardware and fire alarm and security system. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Furnish labor and material warranty for following time periods from date of substantial completion agreeing to repair or replace defects, faulty Work and failures, signed by authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form. 1. Mortise Locksets: components. 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE 2. 3. 4. Exit Devices: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components. Overhead Manual Closers: 10 years. Electrified Hardware: 2 years PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2 Manufacturers and Products: Provide product by one of manufacturers listed below. HARDWARE, GENERAL A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of hardware unit from single manufacturer. Electrified door hardware shall be from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and are listed by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. B. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Hardware units shall not have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire rated labels; manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. C. Base Metals: Hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. D. Fasteners: Hardware units manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Concealed Fasteners: Hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is only means of securely attaching hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For following fire rated applications: a. b. c. 3. Mortise hinges to doors. Strike plates to frames. Closers to doors and frames. Steel Through Bolts: provided: a. b. c. For following fire rated applications unless door blocking is Surface hinges to doors. Closers to doors and frames. Surface mounted exit devices. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE 4. 5. E. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. Fasteners for Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. 2. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 in (1,000 mm) or less above sill. F. Accessibility Requirements: Hardware units and installation shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A 117.1, and state and local accessibility standards. G. Electrical Requirements: Furnish electrical products that are listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1. 2.3 Electrified Functions: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle. BUTT HINGES A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.1, Grade 1. B. Description: 1. 2. Generic Type: Full-mortise, concealed bearings. Weight: a. b. 3. Doors with Closers: Heavy anti-friction bearing. Doors without Closers: Standard plain bearing. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, hinge pins as follows: a. b. c. d. e. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. Top Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. Bottom Tips: Hole in bottom for easy pin removal. C. Templates: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and wood frames, provide only template-produced units. D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws with heads to match surface of hinges. 1. 2. 3. Metal Doors and Metal Frames: Machine screws installed into drilled and tapped holes. Wood Doors and Wood Frames: Wood screws. Fire Rated Wood Doors: No. 12 by 1-1/4 in (32 mm), threaded-to-head steel wood screws. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE E. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. F. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.4 Hager Companies (HAG); BB1168 McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK); T4A3786 Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division of The Stanley Works (STH); FBB168 PIVOTS A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1. B. Description: Full-mortise, single-acting or double-acting, center or offset, mounting, fire rated when required, lead-lined when required. 1. 2. 3. Top Pivot: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze bearing. Standard Intermediate Pivot: Oil-impregnated bronze bearing. Bottom Pivot: Thrust ball or needle bearing. C. Templates: Except for pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. D. Screws: Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 1. 2. 3. Metal Doors and Frames: Phillips flat-head machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. Wood Doors and Frames: Phillips flat-head wood screws. Fire Rated Wood Doors and Frames: Phillips flat-head threaded-to-head steel wood screws. E. Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. F. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.5 IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE). McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK). Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RIX). FLUSH BOLTS A. Constant Latching Flush Bolts: 1. Product Quality Standards: a. b. 2. ANSI/BHMA A 156.16. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors. Description: a. Constant latching flush bolt at top remaining engaged when active door is opened, retracting only when plunger on face of bolt is depressed. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE b. c. 3. 4. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. B. Door Controls International (DCI); 805, 905 Series with No. 80 or No. 81 dustproof strike. Hager Companies (HAG); 293D, 294D with 280X dustproof strike. Ives Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE); FB50, FB60 Series with DP1 or DP2 dustproof strike. Trimco (TBM); 3820, 3825 with 3910 or 3910N dustproof strike. Manual Flush Bolts: 1. Product Quality Standards: a. b. 2. b. 3. 4. ANSI/BHMA A 156.16. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors. Description: a. Minimum 1/2 in (12 mm) round rods, forged brass or bronze, furnished in pairs, (top and bottom of door); lengths of rod 12 in (300 mm); where door is higher than 84 in (2.13 m), top bolt shall be of sufficient length to locate flush bolt operator 72 in (1.83 m) above finish floor. Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. 2.6 Automatic flush bolt at bottom. Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike. Rockwood Mfg. Inc. 550, with 570 dustproof strike Hager Companies (HAG); 281D. Trimco (TBM); 244B, 3815 with 3910 or 3910N dustproof strike. CYLINDERS A. Cylinders: Provided by the Owner B. Permanent Cores: Provided by the Owner 2.7 KEYING A. 2.8 Keying System: Provided by the Owner MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Product Quality Standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA A 156.13, Grade 1 Operational and Security, except extended cycle performance testing shall be 6 million cycles minimum. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE B. Description: 1. Mortise Box Construction: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Extra Heavy duty construction with minimum wrought case thickness of not less than 0.093 in (2.3 mm) thickness. 8 in (200 mm) by 1-1/4 in (32 mm) front adjustable to 1/8 in (3 mm) in 2 in (50 mm). 2-3/4 in (69 mm) backset. Minimum 3/4 in (19 mm) latchbolt throw, or as required for fire rated doors. Minimum 1 in (25 mm) deadbolt throw. Split hubs for split spindles. Lever handles supported by internal spring. Square, split spindles (with all-thread connector), set-screw receiver/retainer notch. Strikes: Metal strike plate with extended lip to protect frame, and with metal or plastic strike box. a. b. Single Swing Doors: Minimum lip projection necessary to project from trim. Pairs of Doors: With or without astragal, lip projection not beyond face of lock style of inactive leaf. C. Function, Accessories, Lever Base Metal, Face Plate, Rose, and Finish: PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. D. Manufacturers and products: 1. 2. 3. 2.9 As scheduled in Best Access Systems; Division of The Stanley Works (BAS); 45 H Series. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR); ML2000 Series. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL); 8800 Series. HOSPITAL LATCHSETS A. Product Quality Standards: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors. B. Description: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Push-pull latchset with 1/2 in (12 mm) throw and 5 in (125 mm) backset. Cover approximately 2-1/2 in (62 mm) by 5-1/2 in (137 mm). Handle approximately 1-1/2 in (38 mm) by 4-1/2 in (112 mm). Projection approximately 2-1/2 in (62 mm). Engraved “PUSH” and “PULL” on handles, push handle pointing downward and pull handle pointing upward. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE D. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.10 Architectural Builders Hardware (ABH). Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). Rockwood Manufacturing Company (ROC). EXIT DEVICES A. Product Quality Standards: B. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.3, Grade 1, except extended cycle performance testing shall be 8 million cycles minimum. 1. 2. 3. 4. C. NFPA 101 in means of egress. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors. Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Description: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Heavy Duty Push bar type, unless scheduled otherwise. Concealed vertical rods on pairs of doors, unless surface mounted vertical rods required for fire rated doors. Mortise lock or rim type devices on single doors only. Outside trim as scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Except on fire rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip units with keyed dogging device to keep latch bolt retracted, when engaged. Except at doors with thresholds, provide vertical rod devices which hold rods in retracted position when door is open. D. Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. E. Manufacturers and products: 1. 2. 3. 2.11 Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR); ED5000 Series / ED4000 Series Narrow Stile. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 80 Series. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VON); 98/99 Series., 33 Series CLOSERS A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4. Grade 1, except cycle testing shall be 4 million cycles minimum. B. Description: Manual overhead surface cast iron body closers with 1-1/2” diameter cylinder bore. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 9 DOOR HARDWARE C. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. D. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible, provide adjustable units complying with accessibility requirements for door opening force and delayed action closing. E. Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. F. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.12 A. STOPS AND HOLDERS Product Quality Standard 1. 2. 3. 4. B. 2.13 Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR) DC8200 LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 4011, 4111 SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT)-281-0 Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1. Overhead Stays: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A 156.15; coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for fire rated doors. Door Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.6. B. Description: Minimum 0.050 in (1.25 mm) thick metal plates with beveled top and 2 sides fabricated in following configurations: 1. 2. 3. 4. Armor Plates: 36 in (900 mm) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops. Kick Plates: 15 in (300 mm) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops. Mop Plates: 6 in (150 mm) high by 1 in (25 mm) less than door width. Door Edging: a. b. Angle: 7/8 in (21 mm) legs by 42 in (1050 mm) high mortised into door edge. Cap: 7/8 in (21 mm) legs by thickness of door by 42 in (1050 mm) high mortised into door edge. C. Fasteners: Exposed fasteners consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws. D. Width and Thickness: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. E. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 10 DOOR HARDWARE F. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.14 A. DOOR GASKETING Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.22, and according to following when required: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. A. National Guard Products (NGP). Pemko Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PEM). Hager Companies ( HAG ) MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE Boxed Power Supplies: 1. 2. B. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm/ft (0.000774 cu m/s/m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control according to ASTM E 283. Smoke Leakage: Comply with NFPA 105 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated according to UL 1784. Fire Rating: Comply with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction according to NFPA 252. After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 in (1,000 mm) or less above sill. Sound Rating: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency according to ASTM E 1408. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 2.15 Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE). Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). Description: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems. Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Auxiliary Hardware: 1. 2. 3. Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Manufacturers: a. b. c. C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVE). Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). Trimco (TBM). Silicone Sealant: Exterior non-sag silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.” HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 11 DOOR HARDWARE 2.16 FINISHES A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.18, as scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. B. Protection: Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine doors and frames to receive door hardware and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. B. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A 250.6. C. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. D. Electrical: Verify raceway system and other provisions for electrical power are adequate for electrified door hardware installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Respective manufacturer’s installation instructions. ANSI/DHI A 115.IG. Approved submittals. Contract Documents. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 12 DOOR HARDWARE 2. C. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." Hardware Installation: 1. 2. 3. Set hardware items level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. Do not install surface-mounted hardware items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. Provide one power supply for each door opening. E. Control Wiring: 1. 2. 3.4 Raceways: As specified and provided under appropriate Division 16 Section. Connections: Coordinate with appropriate Division 16 Section. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. 3.5 Manufacturers Field Service: Manufacturers technical representative shall periodically inspect Work to insure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations designs, recommendations, instructions and warranty requirements. Representative shall submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings and conclusions of inspection. ADJUSTMENTS A. Post-Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of substantial completion, qualified technicians of supplier or installer, accompanied by manufacturers technical representatives of locksets, exit devices, closers, and other hardware manufacturers as required, shall perform following Work: 1. 2. B. Examine and adjust each item of hardware as necessary to restore proper function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty materials or installation. Maintenance Service: 1. First Year Maintenance Service: Beginning at date of substantial completion, supplier or installer shall provide 12 months maintenance service by qualified technicians. a. b. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in manufacture and installation of original products. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 13 DOOR HARDWARE 3.6 CLOSE-OUT ACTIVITIES A. 3.7 Operational and Maintenance Training: Train Owner's personnel on maintenance, operation, and adjustment of door hardware at Project using factory-trained and certified technicians. Provide attendees with bound copies of training materials HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Refer to the drawings. Provide products as listed in hardware sets or provide a comparable product from another listed manufacturer. Do not provide products by manufacturers not listed in this specification. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 7100 - 14 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 08 8000 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Glass, glazing, and supplementary items necessary for installation; including glass specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of each type of glazing in conjunction with the appropriate framing system; indicate type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material, and quantity. Include details indicating glazing thickness, bite on glass, glass edge clearance, and depth of rabbet. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: For each type of glass product and glazing material, in the form of 12 in (300 mm) square sample for glass (except clear) and of 12 in (300 mm) long samples for glazing materials. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Documents: Certifications by the manufacturer that its products and systems are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued. 1. 2. 3. F. Certification attesting application and use of glass for effects of thermal loading under expected service temperature ranges has been reviewed, and specified maximum probabilities of breakage will not be exceeded. Certifications attesting performance for specified design wind load criteria, has been reviewed; furnish design factor, statistical probability of breakage and center deflection for the largest size of each thickness and type. Certifications attesting face pressure of heat-strengthened glass units falls within limits specified. Glass determined to be outside these limits shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 1 GLAZING G. Qualification Data: 1. H. Warranty: 1. I. 1.3 For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years of experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 1. 2. D. 1.4 Experience: Installer’s personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to manufacturer to install products. Certification: Installer shall be certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. Acceptable Products: Complying with CSPC 16 CFR 1201, Category II. Products Not Permitted: Wired Glass. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 2 GLAZING 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. B. Glass Type Schedules: 1. 2.2 Interior: As indicated on the drawings. Provide glazing panes 1/4 in (6 mm) thick unless noted otherwise. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. 2.3 Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4 Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated, where recommended by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements or required for safety glazing. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. B. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16 inch (5 mm) nominal thickness. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Safti First, a Division of O'Keefe's Inc.; SuperLite C/SP (for ratings up to 45-minute only) Schott North America, Inc.; Pyran Star Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-R HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 3 GLAZING 2. C. Locations: Where indicated on drawings for 20-, 45-, 60-, and 90-minute ratings where safety glazing is not required. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16inch (8-mm) total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. 2. 2.5 Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus Oldcastle Glass, Inc.; Pyroguard Schott North America, Inc.; Pyran Star L Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L Locations: Where indicated on drawings for 20-, 45-, 60-, 90-, and 120-minute ratings where safety glazing is required. GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. 2. 3. B. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. Additional Movement Capability: Provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. 2. C. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Silglaze II. Pecora Corporation; 895. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 4 GLAZING 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. 2.7 AAMA 806.3 tape is for high-performance commercial glazing applications involving continuous pressure from gaskets or pressure-generating stop designs. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 5 GLAZING B. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 3.2 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. Presence and functioning of weep systems. Minimum required face and edge clearances. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 3.3 Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. C. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 6 GLAZING F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). 1. 2. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. 3.5 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 7 GLAZING 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.8 GLAZING SCHEDULE A. Tape Glazing: 1. 2. B. Interior door glass lites. Interior borrowed lights less than 75 united inches. Sealant and Tape Glazing: 1. Interior borrowed lights greater than 75 united inches. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 08 8000 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Metal framing systems, interior gypsum board faced walls, partitions, and ceiling assemblies, and supplementary items necessary for installation. DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms not defined in this Section or in other referenced quality standards. B. Damage: Stored or installed paper-faced gypsum board materials not specifically manufactured as “moisture-resistant products” shall be classified as defective and nonconforming Work if they have been exposed to wetness or dampness at any time prior to Substantial Completion or if they exhibit evidence of active or dormant mold or mildew. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. B. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Include scaled and dimensioned drawings showing locations of control joints. 1. Gypsum Board Location Schedule: Provide detailed schedule in format similar to “Gypsum Board Schedule” at end of this Section indicating gypsum board products to be installed and their respective locations. C. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. D. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required. E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. B. Fire Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119/NFPA 251/UL 263 by one of following independent testing and inspecting agency as evidenced by design designation included in their associated approval manual: 1. 2. 3. UL - “Fire Resistance Directory”, Category BXUV. GA 600 - “Fire Resistance Design Manual”. Other agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Smoke Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to indicated fire resistance rated assemblies by independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Sound (STC) Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by independent and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.6 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.7 Environmental Conditions: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or respective gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. 2.2 Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials. B. Design Loads: Engineer to withstand design loads including but not limited to gravity, wind, seismic, and erection design loads established by authorities having jurisdiction, applicable local building codes, and as indicated. 1. Structural Movement: Engineer to withstand movements of structure including, but not limited to, drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. Contractor shall obtain required design data and identify movements accommodated on submittal drawings. a. C. 2.4 Accommodate plus or minus 3/8 in (10 mm) differential vertical deflection of floors. Dimensional Tolerances: Engineer products and systems to accommodate dimensional tolerances of framing members and adjacent construction. METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Material Quality Standard: Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. 2. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM C 645 for metal. Protective Coating - Standard Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized coating, unless otherwise indicated. Metal Studs and Floor Track (Runners): 1. Standard Metal Framing Components for Typical Partitions: a. Stud Description: C-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with 1 1/4 in (32 mm) flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 13/64 in (5 mm) wide minimum return lip; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section; with web punchouts. 1) b. Alternative Jamb Stud Members - Contractor’s Option: “Heavy Duty” or “King” studs; C-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with 3 in (75 mm) flange width; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section. Track (Runner) Description: U-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal thickness as studs. 1) 2) Floor Track (Runner): 1-1/4in (32 mm). Top of Wall Track (Runner): 3 in (75 mm). HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Conversion of Gage to Minimum Thickness for Metal Framing: When metal framing is indicated to be of a specific gage thickness, following shall be uncoated base metal thickness according to SSMAs “Product Technical Information”, 2000 : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 3. 4. 25 Gage: 0.0188 in (0.48 mm) design thickness; 18 mils minimum thickness. 22 Gage: 0.0283 in (0.72 mm) design thickness; 27 mils minimum thickness. 20 Gage Drywall: 0.0312 in (0.79 mm) design thickness; 30 mils minimum thickness. 20 Gage Structural: 0.0346 in (0.88 mm) design thickness; 33 mils minimum thickness. 18 Gage: 0.0451 in (1.15 mm) design thickness; 43 mils minimum thickness. 16 Gage: 0.0566 in (1.44 mm) design thickness; 54 mils minimum thickness. 14 Gage: 0.0713 in (1.81 mm) design thickness; 68 mils minimum thickness. 12 Gage: 0.1017 in (2.58 mm) design thickness; 97 mils minimum thickness. Optional Equivalent Products: Thickness as required for meeting specified criteria for deformed metal studs and tracks (runners) specified elsewhere in this Article. Minimum thickness represents 95 percent of design thickness and is minimum acceptable thickness of material for Work. Optional Equivalent Products - Deformed Metal Studs and Tracks (Runners): a. b. c. d. Evaluation Criteria: Product test reports and certifications from independent testing agency indicating products comply with requirements and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Material Quality Standard: ASTM A 1003 / A 1003M sheet steel with galvanized coating. Stud Description: C-shaped members formed from deformed surface galvanized sheet steel with 1-1/4 in (32 mm) flange edges bent back 90 degrees and bent again to form 3/16 in (5 mm) wide minimum return lip; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section; with web punchouts. Track (Runner) Description: U-shaped members formed from deformed surface galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal thickness as studs. C. Flat Straps and Back-Up Plates: Galvanized sheet steel for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated, of same uncoated base metal thickness as adjacent metal studs. D. Bridging: 1. 2. E. Channel: U-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0566 in (16 gage) (1.44 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness, with 1/2 in (12 mm) flanges and depth fitting stud punchouts. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm by 38 mm) L-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0713 in (14 gage) (1.81 mm) uncoated base metal thickness. Rigid Furring Channels: Hat-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0312 in (20 gage) (0.78 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness; 7/8 in (21 mm) depth and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 in (12 mm) deep members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0283 in (22 gage) (0.72 mm) minimum bare-metal thickness, designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. G. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.5 Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. Building Products Division of Consolidated Fabricators Corp. California Expanded Metal Products Co. (CEMCO). ClarkDietrich Building Systems Marino Ware; Division of Ware Industries. Scafco Corp. GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. Sizes: Maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize short edge-to-short edge butt joints and to correspond to support system indicated. B. Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board Products: 1. Paper-Faced Type X Gypsum Board: a. b. 2. Paper-Faced Type C Gypsum Board: a. b. C. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X. Description: Noncombustible fire resistant gypsum core with paper surfacing on face, back, and long edges; tapered long edges; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X. Description: Noncombustible fire resistant gypsum core, with additives to enhance fire resistance, with paper surfacing on face, back, and long edges; tapered long edges; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board Products: 1. Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: a. b. 2. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X. Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible gypsum core, with moisture-resistant paper surfacing on face, back and long edges; tapered long edges; score of 10 according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. Moisture-Resistant Paperless Glass-Mat Gypsum Board: a. b. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1177 / C 1177M. Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible gypsum core with inorganic, embedded fiberglass mat on both faces; square edges; score or 10 according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Typical Drywall Trim Accessories: 1. 2. 3. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1047. Description: Trim profile fabricated of galvanized steel sheet; of size suitable for gypsum board thickness; with recessed, perforated flange formed to receive joint compound. Trim Products: a. Cornerbead: 1) 2) b. LC-Bead (J-Bead): 1) 2) c. 2) Purpose: For protecting edges of gypsum board that does not require finishing. Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); JStop, 402. Control Joint: 1) 2) 3) f. Purpose: For protecting exposed edges of gypsum board where back flange cannot be used. Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); LTrim, 200-B. J-Stop: 1) 2) e. Purpose: For protecting exposed edges of gypsum board where back flange can be used. Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); JTrim, 200-A. L-Bead: 1) d. Purpose: For protecting outside (external) corners. Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); Dur-ABead Corner Bead, 103. Description: One-piece trim formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. Purpose: For conditions requiring expansion and contraction stresses of large areas of gypsum board to be relieved. Product: Provide the following or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: United States Gypsum Company (USG); Control Joint, 093. Other Trim or Special Shapes: Products as required by condition. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.7 Dietrich Industries, Inc.; Unimast. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals. Marino Ware; Division of Ware Industries. Niles Building Products Co. Superior Metal Trim; Division of Delta Star, Inc. United States Gypsum Company (USG) FASTENERS A. Limitations: Nails and staples are not permitted. B. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Framing to Concrete Structure: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. b. c. 2. 3. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete. Post-installed chemical anchor. Post-installed expansion anchor. Construction Materials, Inc. Heckman Building Products, Inc. Hilti Corp. ITW Ramset/Red Head. Powers Fasteners. Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems. For post-tensioned concrete, anchors shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm) embedment. Obtain Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed anchors in post-tensioned concrete prior to installation. C. Metal Framing Screws: Screw fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten metal framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. D. Gypsum Board Screws: 1. Material Quality Standards: a. Metal Framing Members less than 0.03 in (0.75 mm) Thick: ASTM C 1002, Type S. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES b. 2. E. 2.8 Metal Framing Members from 0.033 in to 0.112 in (0.79 mm to 2.9 mm) Thick: ASTM C 954, Type S-12. Product Description - Standard Applications: Bugle-head, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel screws with Phillips-head recess of size, holding power, and other properties recommended by respective gypsum board manufacturer; minimum 1 in (25 mm) long; with corrosionprotective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Miscellaneous Fasteners: For conditions not indicated, fasteners shall be type, finish, size, and holding power recommended by respective gypsum board manufacturer and conditions. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 475 / C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. 2. C. Joint Compound: 1. 2. 2.9 Paper Tape: Nominal 2 in (50 mm) wide cross-fibered paper tape with finish suitable for bonding, creased in center for easy folding, and compatible with joint compound. Mesh Tape: Nominal 2 in (50 mm) wide self-adhering 10-by-10 fiberglass mesh tape. Setting-Type: Job-mixed powder for mixing with water, chemical-hardening compound; includes taping types. Drying-Type: Ready-mixed or job-mixed powder for mixing with water, air-drying, vinyl based compounds; includes taping, topping, and all-purpose types. RELATED MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced quality standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Firestopping Products at Penetrations: Firestopping”. C. Fiberglass Sound Attenuation Blankets: 1. 2. 3. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I. Description: Unfaced blankets produced by bonding inorganic glass fibers with a thermosetting binder. Surface Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723: a. b. 4. 5. As specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50. Thickness: Not less than 2-1/2 in (62 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro AcoustaTherm Batts. Johns Manville Building Insulation Div.; Sound Control Batts. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES c. d. D. Mineral Wool Sound Attenuation Blankets: 1. 2. 3. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I. Description: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of rock or slag with thermosetting resins. Surface Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723: a. b. 4. 5. 6. Fibrex Insulations, Inc. Rock Wool Manufacturing Co. Roxul. Thermafiber LLC. Acoustical Sealant for Non-Fire Resistance Rated Joints: 1. 2. Description: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. F. Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50. Thickness: Not less than 3 in (75 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Density: Not less than nominal 2.5 pounds per cubic foot. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. E. Knauf Fiber Glass; QuietTherm. Owens Corning; Sound Attenuation Batts. Hilti Inc.; CP 506 Acoustical Sealant and CP 572 Acoustical Spray. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. United States Gypsum Company (USG); Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant. Fire-Resistance Rated and Acoustical Putty Pads: 1. 2. 3. Product Quality Standard: UL 1479. Description: Fire-rated, non-hardening, moldable, intumescent compound formed into sheets designed to seal penetrations, construction gaps, and around electrical boxes against spread of fire, smoke, and toxic gases. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. e. f. Grace Construction Products; Flamesafe FSP 1077 Putty Pads. Hilti; CP 617 Intumescent Acoustic Putty Pads. KnaufDrywall; Putty Pads. Specified Technologies, Inc; Series SSP Putty Pads. Tremco; TREMstop Electrical Box Insert. 3M; Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+Pads. G. Fire Resistive Sealants: Intumescent elastomeric sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “FireResistive Joint Firestopping”. H. Sealants: Sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 9 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. 3.3 Respective Manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. Gypsum Association GA 216. United States Gypsum Company (USG); Gypsum Construction Handbook, if no other installation quality standard applies to condition. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. PREPARATION A. 3.4 General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Resistance Rated Partitions: Construct fire resistance rated, smoke resistance rated, and sound resistance rated partitions according to respective assembly test reports. Ensure every material used within an assembly shall comply with manufacturers listed and product qualities indicated in respective assembly test report. B. Penetrations and Openings: Construct within gypsum board assemblies work as required to properly form penetration or opening to receive firestopping materials specified in following Sections: 1. 2. C. Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping”. Division 07 Section “Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping”. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect and according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Spaced not more than 30 feet in either direction for uninterrupted straight planes of ceilings and walls. Where different substrates occur at ceilings and walls. Where control joints occur in substrates at ceilings and walls. Where ceilings and walls abut inside face of exterior walls. Where L, U, or T shaped ceiling configurations are joined. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 10 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 6. 7. D. Where less-than-ceiling-height door frames occur on walls more than 30 feet in length; extend control joints from top of frame up to ceiling at corner of hinge side of door. Where less-than-ceiling-height borrowed lites occur on walls more than 30 feet in length; extend control joints from top of frame up to ceiling and from bottom of frame to floor at both corners. Isolation from Building Structure: Isolate gypsum board assemblies from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. 2. 3. Provide isolation joints as indicated or required by installation quality standards. Isolate ceiling assemblies abutting or penetrated by building structure. Isolate partition framing and wall furring abutting or penetrated by building structure, except at floor. E. Fire-Resistance Rated and Acoustical Putty Pads: Hand apply pads to surfaces indicated, packing tightly into gaps and openings, in such a manner that pad will remain secured to surface; pinch pleat excess material together to close gaps. F. Supplemental Accessories: Install supplementary framing, blocking, reinforcing, and bracing in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, hand rails, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and recommendations of installation quality standards or manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Priority: Assemble various assemblies giving priority to partitions with higher rating; extend partition with higher rating intact through partition with lower rating. B. Joinery and Connections: Install various metal framing components according to details indicated; for situations and conditions not indicated, comply with installation quality standards and with respective manufacturer’s recommendations. C. General Requirements: Construct partition framing of studs, tracks, and headers using screws of number and spacing required. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Install studs of uncoated base metal thickness as determined by Metal Framing Schedule at end of this Section. Extend partition framing full height to underside of structure above, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at, or immediately above, suspended ceilings. Continue framing over door frames and openings to provide support for gypsum board. Space studs as indicated on Metal Framing Schedule at end of this section. Cut studs 1 in (25 mm) short of full height to provide deflection relief at head of wall conditions. Install studs so that flanges point in same direction. Attach with screws through each stud flange and track (runner) flange, except top deflection track assemblies. For fire resistance rated, smoke resistance rated, and sound resistance rated assemblies that are required to extend to underside of structure above to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor slabs or roof decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and make partitions continuous from floor to underside of structure above. Do not lap studs. At intersections and corners, locate studs no more than 2 in (50 mm) from partition intersections and corners and secure with screws through both flanges of studs and tracks. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES D. Metal Track (Runner) Requirements: 1. 2. Floors: Install tracks (runners) using appropriate fasteners spaced not more than 16 in (400 mm) on centers. Head of Wall: Install deep leg deflection tracks using appropriate fasteners to laterally support assembly, and to avoid axial loading of assembly by deflection from building structure above. E. Support for Wall Mounted Accessories or Equipment: Install back-up plate or track (runner) turned on its side, using screws as indicated or as required, to studs to properly transfer accessory or equipment load to metal framing. F. Openings: Frame single door, double door, above ceiling openings, and below ceiling openings using studs, tracks (runners), clip angles, and headers. 1. 2. 3. 4. Install 2 studs on each side of each opening in configuration indicated, including strap plates; extend from floor to underside of structure above; do not cut these studs under any circumstances. Construct header of appropriate configuration for type of opening to be spanned and secure with clip angles; include sound attenuation blankets within cavity when partition is scheduled to have a sound resistance rating. Install short intermediate studs 16 in (400 mm) on center between top track and header. At partitions indicated to terminate immediately above ceiling, install diagonal bracing at not less than spacing as indicated. G. Supplementary Framing: Install around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by metal framing. H. Penetrations: Maintain fire-resistance rating of assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. I. Chase Partitions: 1. 2. 3. Position double row of studs vertically in tracks (runners), opposite each other in pairs with flanges pointing in same direction. Attach with screws through each stud flange and track (runner) flange. Cross brace between rows of studs with one of following at 48 in (1200 mm) on center maximum vertically, attached to stud webs with screws: a. b. J. Coated glass-mat gypsum board, 12 in (300 mm) high by chase width. Metal studs turned on side, webs back-to-back. Furred Walls: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Erect furring channels vertically, spaced 16 in (400 mm) on centers maximum, unless otherwise indicated. Attach with appropriate fasteners, staggered on flanges. Splice ends by nesting channels 8 in (200 mm) and securely anchoring to surface. Miter 24 in (600 mm) long horizontal furring channels at corners and space 24 in (600 mm) on centers vertically. Locate furring channels around perimeter of openings and secure to surfaces. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 12 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES K. Control Joints: 1. 2. L. 3.6 Construct metal framing as indicated by installation quality standard to allow gypsum board control joints to function as intended. For control joints located in fire resistance rated walls and partitions, construct of metal studs and mineral wool, full height of partition, according to assembly fire test reports. Installation Tolerances: Install each metal stud metal framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 in (3 mm) from plane formed by faces of framing members. INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Isolation from Building Structure: 1. 2. 3. C. Install type of gypsum board at location indicated by gypsum board schedule at end of this Section. Do not install damaged gypsum boards. Install gypsum boards with finishable face side out. Butt gypsum boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 in (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force gypsum boards into place. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Isolate perimeter of walls and partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 in to 1/2 in (6 mm in 12 mm) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of gypsum boards are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Single-Layer Board Assemblies: 1. 2. At typical conditions, install gypsum board vertically (long dimension parallel to metal framing), to minimize short end-to-short end joints unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. At interior of stairwells and other high walls, install gypsum boards horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of gypsum boards. D. Multi-Layer Board Assemblies: Apply base layers and face layers vertically (long dimension parallel to metal framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud space from base layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. E. Typical Wall Applications: 1. 2. 3. 4. Attach gypsum boards to metal studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. Attach gypsum boards to framing provided at doors, openings and cutouts. Install gypsum boards over door heads and extend to not less than one stud space - 16 in (400 mm) at each side of door or opening. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 13 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 5. 6. 7. 8. F. Cover both faces of metal framing with gypsum boards as indicated, except in chase walls that are braced internally. Cut and fit gypsum boards around ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations to form proper annular joint to receive firestopping. Where partitions intersect open building structure members projecting below underside of floor slabs and roof decks, cut to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, beams, and other structural members; form proper annular joint to receive firestopping. Support both edge and end joints of gypsum boards over metal framing. Screw Attachments: 1. Attach gypsum board to metal framing with screw fasteners of type appropriate for gypsum board materials and installation conditions: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Length shall be as required by condition and penetrating metal framing not less than 3/8 in (10 mm). Spacing shall be as recommended by installation quality standard, gypsum board manufacturer, or respective assembly test report. Use properly adjusted, positive-clutch electric power tool equipped with adjustable screw-depth head and a Phillips bit. Nails and staples are not permitted. Drive screws to slightly dimple surface without breaking face paper, fracturing core, or stripping metal framing member around screw shank. Space screws for non-fire resistance rated partitions and ceilings as recommended by installation quality standards. Space screws for fire resistance rated partitions as required by assembly fire test reports. Start field screwing near center and work towards edges. Space screws not less than 3/8 in (10 mm) from gypsum boards edges. Do not attach gypsum boards to top runner where wall or partition extends to building structure unless required by fire test reports. G. Control Joints: Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated with required space between edges of adjoining gypsum boards. H. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Install blankets within stud cavities set so that they are held in place by friction with metal studs; ensure blankets are secure within cavity and will not become displaced when second gypsum board side is closed. I. Sealant: 1. 2. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturers written recommendations for closing off soundflanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. Seal wall assemblies at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of sealant material according to following: a. b. c. Fire Resistance Sealant: Joints within fire resistance rated assemblies. Water Resistance Sealant: Joints within non-fire resistance rated assemblies exposed to possible water infiltration. Acoustical Sealant: All other joints. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 14 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Fasten trim accessories continuously according to accessory manufacturer's instructions using gypsum board screws; installation by clinch-on tool and staples not permitted. B. Typical Trim Accessories: 1. 2. Corner Beads: Install trim at external corners; use screws at each flange at 9 in (225 mm) on centers, opposite each other. Edge Trim: Install trim where gypsum boards abut dissimilar material, and where edge of gypsum boards would otherwise be exposed; use screws at flange at 9 in (225 mm) on centers. a. b. c. 3. 3.8 LC-Bead (J-Bead): Install trim at exposed conditions where back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate before gypsum board installation. L-Bead: Install trim at exposed conditions where trim can only be installed after gypsum board installation. J-Stop: Install trim at concealed conditions where trim can only be installed after gypsum board installation. Control Joints: Install trim at appropriate locations, ensuring gypsum board is not continuous over joint; use screws at each flange at 6 in (150 mm) on centers. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Treat board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare surfaces for decoration. B. Joint Tape: Finish joints according to following: 1. 2. C. Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Paper. Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Mesh tape. Finishing: Finish boards and units to achieve specified level of finish as indicated in schedule at end of Section: 1. Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Either or combination of the following as recommended by manufacturer: a. b. 2. 3.9 Setting-type joint compounds. Drying-type joint compounds. Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Setting-type joint compounds. ADJUSTMENTS A. Damaged Materials: Stored or installed paper-faced gypsum board materials not specifically manufactured as “moisture-resistant products” shall be classified as damaged, defective, and nonconforming Work if they have been exposed to wetness or dampness at any time prior to Substantial Completion or if they exhibit evidence of active or dormant mold or mildew. Damaged materials and assemblies shall be replaced with new and dry materials and assemblies. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 15 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.10 A. 3.11 A. PROTECTION Procedures: Protect products and systems from damage during installation and remainder of construction period according to manufacturer's instructions. METAL FRAMING SCHEDULE Metal Stud Framing Schedule: 1. 2. 3. Stud Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Spacing: Maximum 16 in (400 mm) on centers, unless otherwise indicated, or as required to comply with respective assembly test report. Minimum Performance Requirements - unless otherwise indicated: a. 4. Typical Partitions: L/240 at 5 lb/sq ft (239 Pa) lateral load Minimum Uncoated Base Metal Thickness: a. Typical Gypsum Board Assemblies: As determined by manufacturer’s limiting height engineering data unless otherwise indicated. 1) 2) 3) 25 Gage or 25 Gage Equivalent Studs: Not acceptable. 22 Gage Studs: Typical partitions unless otherwise indicated. 20 Gage or 20 Gage Equivalent Studs: a) b) c) 3.12 Partitions with gypsum board on one side only. At door jambs. Partitions supporting wall hung cabinets or shelving. GYPSUM BOARD SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Schedule, General: Install the designated gypsum board product based on exposure classification to water and / or moisture and applied finish system as follows, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled on the Drawings. B. No Exposure: Surfaces not normally exposed to water and / or moisture sources including but not limited to the following: 1. Typical walls and ceilings. a. b. 2. Horizontal fire-rated assemblies and ceilings: a. C. Paint: Typical paper-faced gypsum board. Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board. Paint: Paper-faced Type C gypsum board. Incidental Exposure: Surfaces immediately adjacent to water and / or moisture sources including, but not limited to, the following locations: 1. 2. Top of walls above ceilings adjacent to mechanical equipment in corridors. Walls and ceilings in mechanical equipment rooms and janitor closets. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. 4. 5. Walls within 24 inches of centerline of drinking fountains, isolated wall-hung lavatories, and countertop sinks and other similar water sources. Interior face of exterior walls. Acceptable gypsum board products for the above listed conditions: a. b. 3.13 Paint: Moisture-resistant paper-faced or moisture-resistant paperless glass-mat gypsum board. Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board. GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Finishing Schedule, General: Finish panels to Levels of Finish indicated below. Apply joint tape over panel joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. Sand between coats and after last coat to produce a surface free of defects and ready for applied finish system. B. Preparation: Apply joint compound at open joints, panel edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Level 1: At following locations, embed tape at joints in joint compound unless a higher level of finish is required for fire resistance rated assemblies: 1. 2. D. Level 2: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges: 1. E. Mechanical, electrical, and data rooms. Level 4: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges: 1. G. Not used. Level 3: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first and second coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges: 1. F. Areas above ceilings. Concealed areas. Areas to receive paint. Level 5: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface: 1. Not used. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 17 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 2900 - 18 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Acoustical lay-in ceiling panels, exposed metal suspension systems, and supplementary items necessary for installation. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. B. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on the Finish Schedule and Drawings. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. 2. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6 in (150 mm) square samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 in (300 mm) long samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. F. 1.3 For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. 1.5 Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.7 Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corporation. Chicago Metallic Corporation. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer if both are offered by the manufacturer. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Products and systems shall be engineered to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84, 2009 VUSBC Section 808, and NFPA 101 Chapter 10; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. C. Seismic Standards: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 2.4 Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings-Seismic Zones 0-2". ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads". ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance's, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: a. 2.5 Refer to the drawings. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Comply with seismic design requirements. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. b. c. 3. Cast-in-place anchors, designed for attachment to concrete. Post-installed expansion anchors. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC1 service condition. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Manufacturers: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 4. D. For post-tensioned concrete, anchors shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm) embedment. Obtain Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed anchors in post-tensioned concrete prior to installation. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. E. Construction Materials, Inc. Heckman Building Products, Inc. Hilti Corp. ITW Ramset/Red Head. Powers Fasteners. Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 / A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 in (2.69 mm) diameter wire. Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. 2. 3. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 4. 5. Where required by Code or authorities having jurisdiction, provide 2 in (50 mm) wide wall angle around the ceiling perimeter in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. Round Column Angle Molding: Extruded aluminum with PVC spacer, size as required for column diameter, finish to match suspension system. F. Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard system, including gasket type indicated below, and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention clips, designed to seal out foreign material from and maintain positive pressure in clean room. G. Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, non-hardening, nonskinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653 / A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16 in (24 mm) wide metal caps on flanges. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. Face Design: Flush face. Cap Material: Steel sheet. Cap Finish: Painted white, unless indicated otherwise. Manufacturers and Products: a. b. c. d. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL CertainTeed Corporation; Classic Stab Chicago Metallic Corporation; 1200 System USG Interiors, Inc.; Donn DX PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. ASTM C635 and ASTM C 636 / C 636M. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS B. 3.3 Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work. C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with mechanical and electrical equipment, insulation, or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural frame or ceiling suspension system. Within limitations allowed by installation quality standards, splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by installation quality standards. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to cast-inplace hanger inserts, power-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. Space hangers not more than 48 in (1200 mm) on center along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 in (200 mm) from ends of each member. Do not connect or suspend any ceiling components from ducts, pipes or conduit. Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling. Concentrated Load Conditions: Provide additional hanger wires at each corner of recessed light fixtures and other concentrated load conditions to prevent excess deflection. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 6 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS C. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 1. E. Space steel main runners at 48 in (1200 mm) on center. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.5 Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 in (400 mm) on center and not more than 3 in (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 in per 12 ft (3 mm per 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. Provide control joints where joints occur in abutting surfaces. Hold tees in place with concealed clips. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. Clean Room Installations: Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions. PROTECTION A. 3.6 Protect products and systems from damage during installation and remainder of construction period according to manufacturer's instructions. CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 7 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 5113 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 6229 CORK FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cork flooring products and systems and supplementary items necessary for installation for the following; 1. 1.2 Cork floor tile. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cork flooring. Include cork flooring layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type, color, pattern, and finish of cork flooring required. D. Product Schedule: For cork flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. G. 1.3 For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. Maintenance Data: For each type of cork flooring to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years of experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6229 - 1 CORK FLOORING B. Slip Resistance: Provide products identical to those tested for slip resistance per ASTM D 2047 with a static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6 for level surfaces and 0.8 for ramped surfaces. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for cork flooring including resilient base and accessories. a. 2. 3. 1.4 Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for each cork flooring type, color, pattern, and finish, in locations directed by Architect. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. 1.5 Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.6 Store cork flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store cork flooring on flat surfaces. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 75 deg F (24 deg C) where relative humidity is between 45 and 65 percent, in spaces to receive cork flooring during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3. 72 hours before installation. During installation. 72 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 75 deg F (24 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during cork flooring installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after cork flooring installation. E. Install cork flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6229 - 2 CORK FLOORING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For cork flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. 2.2 Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. CORK FLOOR TILE A. Composition: 100 percent natural cork bark and recycled cork granules and set in a natural or synthetic, flexible resin matrix; homogeneous and uniform in composition throughout the tile thickness. B. Nominal Density: Manufacturer's standard. C. Nominal Thickness: 0.180 inch (4.8 mm). D. Nominal Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). E. Product Selections: Refer to the drawing. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by cork flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesive: Water-resistant products as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit cork flooring and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6229 - 3 CORK FLOORING 3.3 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Prepare substrates according to cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of cork flooring. C. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. 3. 4. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by cork flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring manufacturer, but not less stringent than the following: a. b. 5. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. Moisture Floor Treatment: For concrete substrates not meeting moisture test standards specified above, apply epoxy-based moisture floor treatment and cementitious overcoat to concrete substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. E. Do not install cork flooring until materials are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. F. 3.4 At least 72 hours in advance of installation, move cork flooring products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by cork flooring. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing cork flooring. B. Mix together floor tiles from each carton to ensure uniform distribution of shade. C. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles. D. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6229 - 4 CORK FLOORING E. Lay floor tiles in pattern indicated. F. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. G. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. I. Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting cork flooring. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing cork flooring installation: 1. 2. 3. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect cork flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover cork flooring until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6229 - 5 CORK FLOORING PART 4 - HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6229 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Resilient flooring products and systems and supplementary items necessary for installation. B. Related Section: 1. 1.2 Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient flooring are specified in Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories". SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. B. Shop Drawings for Special Patterns: Show layout and details of special patterns for resilient flooring. C. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on the Finish Schedule and Drawings. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 in by 9 in (150 mm by 230 mm) sample of each different color and pattern of resilient flooring product specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in Schedules. E. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. F. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required. G. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6500 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING H. 1.3 Maintenance Instructions: Include in operation and maintenance manual as required by Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures”. Submit manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. B. Slip Resistance: Provide products identical to those tested for slip resistance per ASTM D 2047 with a static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6 for level surfaces and 0.8 for ramped surfaces. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. 1.4 Critical Radiant Flux: Class I, 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. 1.5 Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store flooring products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1. 1.6 Resilient Tile Flooring: Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain flooring products prior to installation at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended by manufacturer. D. Install flooring products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6500 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING E. 1.7 Do not install flooring over concrete substrates until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended tests. Refer to “Preparation” Article for requirements. COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. 1. Vinyl Flooring: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. B. Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: 1. 2.2 Altro Group. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock. Congoleum Corporation. Estrie. Forbo Flooring, Inc. Gerflor, Architectural Floor Systems, Inc. Lonseal, Inc. Mannington Mills, Inc. Static Smart. Tarkett, Inc. Refer to the drawings. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. 2.3 Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700, Class 1, monolithic vinyl tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. B. Size: Refer to the drawings: Standards as selected. Laminated Vinyl Strip Flooring. 1. Size: Refer to the drawings. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6500 - 3 RESILIENT FLOORING 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for products and applications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer suitable for products, applications, and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. D. Typical Flooring: Not more than 50 g/L. Moisture Floor Treatment: 1. 2. Epoxy-Based Moisture Floor Treatment: Two-component, high-performance, non-flammable, rapid drying, water based, low odor, low VOC, two-component, penetrating epoxy; formulated to reduce moisture vapor transmission and surface alkalinity from concrete substrates, including aged or freshly placed ("green") concrete, prior to installation of impervious glueddown finish flooring specified in other Division 09 sections. Cementitious Overcoat: Fast-setting latex-fortified Portland cement skim coating intended for interior uses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 3.3 Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6500 - 4 RESILIENT FLOORING B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. 3. Verify that concrete substrate finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Concrete Finishing" for concrete substrates receiving resilient flooring. Verify that concrete substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Unless concrete has been watercured, then proceed with the following: a. b. 4. 5. 6. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing the following tests as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. A pH range of 5 to 9 is required when substrate is wetted with distilled water and pHydrion paper is applied. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform one or both of the following tests as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Perform 3 moisture tests for first 1000 sf (92.9 sm) of concrete substrate scheduled to receive flooring and 1 test for each additional 1000 sf (92.9 sm) or fraction thereof. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates pass testing. a. b. 7. Shot-blast concrete substrate with an apparatus that abrades the surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test in accordance with ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates have maximum moisture-vaporemission rate of 3 lbs of water/1000 sf (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sm) in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes in accordance with ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. Moisture Floor Treatment: For concrete substrates not meeting moisture test standards specified above, apply epoxy-based moisture floor treatment and cementitious overcoat to concrete substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before flooring product installation. After cleaning, reexamine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT FLOORING, GENERAL A. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend flooring to center of door openings. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6500 - 5 RESILIENT FLOORING D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on substrate. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device. E. Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. F. 3.5 Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Hand-roll flooring in both directions from center out to embed flooring in adhesive and eliminate trapped air according to manufacturer's written instructions. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press flooring firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument. INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT TILE FLOORING A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. 2. 3.6 Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction, unless otherwise indicated. CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing flooring products: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from exposed surfaces using cleaner recommended by flooring manufacturer. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. 1. 2. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until just prior to Substantial Completion. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6500 - 6 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Resilient wall base, resilient flooring accessories, and supplementary items necessary for installation. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. B. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on the Finish Schedule and Drawings. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 12 in (300 mm) sample of each different color and pattern of resilient product specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. E. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. F. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. Critical Radiant Flux: Class I, 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6513 - 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. 1.5 Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.6 Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by product manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless otherwise recommended by product manufacturer. B. Maintain resilient products prior to installation at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation and for time period after installation recommended by manufacturer. D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. Flexco, Inc. Johnsonite. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. Roppe Corporation, USA. Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: 1. Refer to the drawings. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6513 - 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. 2.3 Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. RESILIENT MATERIALS A. Rubber Wall Base: 1. 2. 3. Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group 1 and 2. Thickness: Nominal 1/8 in (3 mm). Outside and Inside Corners: a. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4 Pre-formed. Resilient Flooring Accessories: Reducer strip and others as required. Carpeting Accessories: Carpet cove cap, carpet step-off, carpet reducer, carpet edge bar. Material: Rubber. Color and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by product manufacturer suitable for products, applications, and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Wall Base: Not more than 50 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6513 - 3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 3.3 PREPARATION A. 3.4 General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. Pre-formed Corners: Install pre-formed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT FLOORING ACCESSORIES A. 3.6 Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from exposed surfaces using cleaner recommended by manufacturer. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by manufacturer. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6513 - 4 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 6800 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: installation. B. Resilient wall base and resilient molding accessories installed with carpeting are specified in Division 09 Section “Resilient Base and Accessories”. 1.2 Carpeting products and systems and supplementary items necessary for SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. B. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. Shop Drawings: Provide floor plans, including columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations of cutouts, to indicate the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Carpeting type and color. Seam locations, types, and methods. Type of substrate. Type of installation. Pattern type, location, and direction. Pile direction. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on the Finish Schedule and Drawings. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6 in by 9 in (150 mm by 230 mm) sample of each different color, texture, and pattern of carpeting product specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in Schedules. 1. E. Seam Samples for Sheet Carpeting: Provide sample of sheet carpeting seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 in by 9 in (150 mm by 230 mm) sample prepared by installer for this Project. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 1 CARPETING F. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required. G. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer. 1. 2. H. Warranty: Sample of warranty. 1. I. 1.3 For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive submittal of qualification data for available manufacturers listed in this Section. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions. Maintenance Instructions: Include in operation and maintenance manual as required by Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures”. Submit manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. 2. 3. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. 1.4 Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project site during times specified Work is in progress that is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to manufacturer to install products. Critical Radiant Flux: Class I, 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 2 CARPETING 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.6 General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling". PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity". B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpeting until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Maintain carpeting products prior to installation at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. D. Close spaces to traffic during carpeting installation and for time period after installation recommended by manufacturer. E. Install carpeting products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. F. Do not install carpeting over concrete substrates until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by carpeting manufacturer's recommended tests. Refer to “Preparation” Article for requirements. 1.7 COORDINATION A. 1.8 Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty for Carpeting: Furnish manufacturer’s written material and labor warranty signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to furnish materials and labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits material defects caused by manufacture or design and installation of product. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required. 1. 2. B. Coverage of warranty includes but is not limited to more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and labor Defects for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpeting due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 3 CARPETING 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish the following extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents: 1. Sheet Carpeting: Furnish not less than 10 linear ft (3 linear m) in roll form and full roll width, for each 500 linear ft (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each color, pattern, and type of sheet carpeting product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed. B. Selections: Provide the following product or a comparable product from one of the other listed available manufacturers: 1. 2.2 Refer to the drawings. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by carpeting manufacturer. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by carpeting manufacturer. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Not more than 50 g/L. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 4 CARPETING D. Seaming Adhesive for Sheet Carpet: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpeting manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. E. Moisture Floor Treatment: 1. 2. Epoxy-Based Moisture Floor Treatment: Two-component, high-performance, non-flammable, rapid drying, water based, low odor, low VOC, two-component, penetrating epoxy; formulated to reduce moisture vapor transmission and surface alkalinity from concrete substrates, including aged or freshly placed ("green") concrete, prior to installation of impervious glueddown finish flooring specified in other Division 09 sections. Cementitious Overcoat: Fast-setting latex-fortified Portland cement skim coating intended for interior uses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified: 1. 2. 3. 3.3 Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Accepted submittals. Contract Documents. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation" and carpeting manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpeting installation. C. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. Verify that concrete substrate finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Concrete Finishing" for concrete substrates receiving carpeting. Verify that concrete substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 5 CARPETING 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Unless concrete has been watercured, then proceed with the following: a. b. 4. 5. 6. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing the following tests as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. A pH range of 5 to 9 is required when substrate is wetted with distilled water and pHydrion paper is applied. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform one or both of the following tests as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Perform 3 moisture tests for first 1000 sf (92.9 sm) of concrete substrate scheduled to receive flooring and 1 test for each additional 1000 sf (92.9 sm) or fraction thereof. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates pass testing. a. b. 7. Shot-blast concrete substrate with an apparatus that abrades the surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test in accordance with ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates have maximum moisture-vaporemission rate of 3 lbs of water/1000 sf (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sm) in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes in accordance with ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after concrete substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. Moisture Floor Treatment: For concrete substrates not meeting moisture test standards specified above, apply epoxy-based moisture floor treatment and cementitious overcoat to concrete substrate in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpeting. After cleaning, reexamine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CARPETING, GENERAL A. Scribe, cut, and fit carpeting to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. B. Extend carpeting into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend carpeting to center of door openings. C. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish carpeting as marked on substrate. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. E. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpeting manufacturer. F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders unless otherwise indicated. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 6 CARPETING G. 3.5 Hand-roll carpeting in both directions from center out to embed carpeting in adhesive and eliminate trapped air according to manufacturer's written instructions. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press carpeting firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument. INSTALLATION OF ADHERED SHEET CARPETING A. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by carpeting manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. B. Sheet Carpet at Concrete Substrates without Padding: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation" and carpeting manufacturer's written installation instructions for direct-gluedown installation. C. Sheet Carpet at Concrete Substrates with Padding: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "DoubleGlue-Down Installation" and carpeting manufacturer's written installation instructions for doubleglue-down installation. 1. D. Adhere to concrete substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with carpeting manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. E. 3.6 Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Comply with carpeting manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpeting; maintain uniformity of carpeting direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpeting: 1. 2. 3. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes from exposed surfaces using cleaner recommended by carpeting manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpeting surface. Vacuum carpeting using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpeting to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations". C. Protect carpeting against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpeting manufacturer. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 7 CARPETING HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 6800 - 8 UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA HEALTH SYSTEM MEDICAL CENTER ON-DEMAND CONSTRUCTION UVA UH HEP OFFICE SUITE CHARLOTTESVILLE, VIRGINIA SECTION 09 9100 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Section Includes: Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where indicated that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. C. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. 2. Prefinished wood doors. Acoustical materials. Prefinished Architectural woodwork and cabinets. Elevator equipment. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. Light fixtures. Distribution cabinets. Baked enamel coated items. Fluorocarbon coated items. Integral colored plaster. Integral colored PVC. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Foundation spaces. Furred areas. Ceiling plenums. Utility tunnels. Pipe spaces. Duct shafts. Elevator shafts. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09 9100 - 1 PAINTING 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. b. c. d. e. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. b. c. d. 5. 1.2 A. Valve and damper operators. Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. a. D. Anodized aluminum. Stainless steel. Chromium plate. Copper and copper alloys. Bronze and brass. Embossed UL labels may be used and painted where acceptable to authority having jurisdiction Refer to Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board assemblies. DEFINITIONS MPI Gloss Levels: MPI Gloss and Sheen Standard values are measured per ASTM D523, Method D and are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Gloss Level 1: Gloss Level 2: Gloss Level 3: Gloss Level 4: Gloss Level 5: Gloss Level 6: Gloss Level 7: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees. Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. More than 85 units at 60 degrees. B. Exterior Painting: Generally includes surfaces located in unconditioned spaces. C. Interior Painting: Generally includes surfaces located in conditioned spaces. 1.3 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 2 PAINTING B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. C. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 in (200 mm) square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Field Quality Control Test Reports: Written report of testing and inspection required by "Field Quality Control" Article below. E. Manufacturers Project Acceptance Document: Certification that products are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that warranty will be issued. 1. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1. 2. 1.4 Certifications by manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Architect may waive Submittal of Qualification Data for Available Manufacturers listed in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years experience with successful production of products and systems similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful inservice performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 10 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work. B. MPI Standards: 1. 2. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 3 PAINTING C. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. a. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. 1) 2) 3) b. c. Apply samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. 1) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. A. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. Clean exposed faces of mock-up. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be installed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Protect approved mock-up from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting fabrication. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for review of the completed Work. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically noted by Contractor, submitted to Architect in writing, and approved by Architect in writing. Demolish and remove mockups when directed by Architect unless approved to become part of the completed Work. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. 2. 1.7 Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. Demonstrate repair procedures for damaged surfaces. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. PROJECT CONDITIONS Apply paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between minimum and maximum range recommended by manufacturer. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 4 PAINTING B. 1.8 A. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. COORDINATION Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures". 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. 2.2 AkzoNobel Paints, dba Glidden Professional (formerly ICI Paints) Benjamin Moore & Co. Comex Group, including regional brands Color Wheel Paint, Frazee Paint, Kwal Paint, and Parker Paint Dunn-Edwards Corporation Kelly-Moore Paints PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Pratt & Lambert Paints Sherwin-Williams Company (The) Color and Gloss: Refer to the drawings. PAINT, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and field applied primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Material Compatibility: 1. 2. 2.3 A. INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50; for interior concrete, plaster and gypsum board. 1. 2. B. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. VOC Content: E Range of E1, 101 - 150 g/l, or E2, 51 - 100 g/l, or E3 less than 51 g/l. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR1 or EPR2 or EPR3. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107; for interior ferrous metal. 1. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E2, 101 - 150 g/l, or E3 less than 101 g/l. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR2 or EPR3. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 5 PAINTING C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Primer/Sealer: MPI #149; for use as a primer with interior institutional low-odor/VOC latex intermediate and topcoats. 1. 2. 2.4 A. LATEX PAINTS, INTERIOR Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3); for interior surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. B. A. VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR4.5. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5); for interior surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 2.5 VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR3. VOC Content: E Range of E3 less than 11 g/l. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR5.5. EPOXY COATINGS, INTERIOR WALLS AND CEILINGS Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior (Semigloss): MPI #215 (MPI Gloss Level 5); for interior concrete, concrete masonry units and gypsum board. 1. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E1, 201 - 300 g/l, or E2, 101 - 200 g/l, or E3 less than 101 g/l. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to shop applicators to ensure use of compatible primers. 3.2 A. INSTALLATION Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform gypsum fabrications work according to the following, unless otherwise specified in this Section: 1. 2. 3. Respective manufacturer's written installation instructions. Approved submittals. Contract Documents. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 6 PAINTING 3.3 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. 2. D. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates, unless expressly permitted by authorities having jurisdiction for labels intended to be painted. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 1. 3.4 A. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. APPLICATION Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable items, equipment, and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items, equipment, or furniture with prime coat only. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. Paint interior surfaces of non-ducted return air penums with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 7 PAINTING 8. 9. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. F. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces, exterior walls and on roofs including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. Electrical Work: a. b. c. 3.5 Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets with a flat, nonspecular black paint. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. Switchgear. Panelboards. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 8 PAINTING E. 3.6 At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces to match approved samples. PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Mechanical Rooms: Provide complete painting of piping in mechanical rooms only. B. Conform to requirements of ANSI/ASME A13.1 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems". 3.7 A. FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER IDENTIFICATION Corridor partitions, smokestop partitions, horizontal exit partitions, exit enclosures and fire walls shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs, labels or stencils in a manner acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1. 3.8 A. Identification shall be above decorative ceiling and in concealed spaces. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. b. c. d. 2. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System: MPI INT 9.2F. a. b. c. d. B. Prime Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC primer/sealer. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex. Gloss and Sheen: Refer to the drawings. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior. Topcoat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior. Gloss and Sheen: Semigloss. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S. a. b. c. d. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based). Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex. Gloss and Sheen: Semigloss. END OF SECTION HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 9 PAINTING HKS 16567.004 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PIMS # P02990, WO # 1496104 2014-01-15 09910 - 10
© Copyright 2024